DVD Recorder
DVR-630H-S
DVR-530H-S
™
™
Operating Instructions
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WARNING
This product incorporates copyright protection technology
that is protected by method claims of certain U.S. patents
and other intellectual property rights owned by
To prevent a fire hazard, do not place any naked
flame sources (such as a lighted candle) on the
Macrovision Corporation and other rights owners. Use of
this copyright protection technology must be authorized
by Macrovision Corporation, and is intended for home and
other limited viewing uses only unless otherwise
authorized by Macrovision Corporation. Reverse
engineering or disassembly is prohibited.
equipment.
D3-4-2-1-7a_A_En
Operating Environment
Operating environment temperature and humidity:
+5 ºC – +35 ºC (+41 ºF – +95 ºF); less than 85 %RH
(cooling vents not blocked)
Do not install this unit in a poorly ventilated area, or in
locations exposed to high humidity or direct sunlight (or
This product is for general household purposes. Any failure
due to use for other than household purposes (such as long-
term use for business purposes in a restaurant or use in a
car or ship) and which requires repair will be charged for
strong artificial light)
D3-4-2-1-7c_A_En
even during the warranty period.
K041_En
VENTILATION CAUTION
This product includes FontAvenue® fonts licenced by NEC
corporation. FontAvenue is a registered trademark of NEC
Corporation.
When installing this unit, make sure to leave space
around the unit for ventilation to improve heat
radiation (at least 10 cm at top, 10 cm at rear, and
10 cm at each side).
WARNING
Slots and openings in the cabinet are provided for
ventilation to ensure reliable operation of the
product, and to protect it from overheating. To
prevent fire hazard, the openings should never be
blocked or covered with items (such as newspapers,
table-cloths, curtains) or by operating the
POWER-CORD CAUTION
Handle the power cord by the plug. Do not pull out the
plug by tugging the cord and never touch the power
cord when your hands are wet as this could cause a
short circuit or electric shock. Do not place the unit, a
piece of furniture, etc., on the power cord, or pinch the
cord. Never make a knot in the cord or tie it with other
cords. The power cords should be routed such that they
are not likely to be stepped on. A damaged power cord
can cause a fire or give you an electrical shock. Check
the power cord once in a while. When you find it
damaged, ask your nearest PIONEER authorized
service center or your dealer for a replacement. S002_En
equipment on thick carpet or a bed.
D3-4-2-1-7b_A_En
If the AC plug of this unit does not match the AC
outlet you want to use, the plug must be removed
and appropriate one fitted. Replacement and
mounting of an AC plug on the power supply cord of
this unit should be performed only by qualified
service personnel. If connected to an AC outlet, the
cut-off plug can cause severe electrical shock. Make
sure it is properly disposed of after removal.
The equipment should be disconnected by removing
the mains plug from the wall socket when not left
unused for a long period of time (for example, when
on vacation).
D3-4-2-2-1a_A_En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Contents
01 Before you start
06 Recording
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
What’s in the box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Putting the batteries in the remote control . . . . . . . . . 8
Using the remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Disc / content format playback compatibility . . . . . . . 9
About the internal hard disk drive. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
About DVD recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
About HDD recording. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Recording time and picture quality. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Recorded audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Restrictions on video recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Setting the picture quality/recording time . . . . . . . . 51
Basic recording from the TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Setting a timer recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Timer recording FAQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Simultaneous recording and playback . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Recording from an external component . . . . . . . . . . 57
Recording from a DV camcorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Playing your recordings on other DVD players . . . . . 59
Initializing a recordable DVD disc. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
02 Connecting up
Rear panel connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Front panel connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Extra features for use with compatible TVs . . . . . . . . 13
Easy connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Using other types of audio/video output . . . . . . . . . . 15
Connecting to a cable box, satellite receiver or
digital terrestrial receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Connecting an external decoder box (1) . . . . . . . . . . 17
Connecting an external decoder box (2) . . . . . . . . . . 18
Connecting to an AV amplifier/receiver . . . . . . . . . . 19
Connecting other AV sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Plugging in. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
07 Playback
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Navigating discs and the HDD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Using the Disc Navigator to browse the contents
of a disc.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Scanning discs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Playing in slow motion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Frame advance/frame reverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
The Play Mode menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Displaying and switching subtitles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Switching DVD soundtracks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Switching audio channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Switching camera angles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
03 Controls and displays
Front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Remote control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
04 Getting started
Switching on and setting up. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Setting up the GUIDE Plus+™ system . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Selecting the hard disk or DVD for playback and
recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Making your first recording. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Using the built-in TV tuner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Basic playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Using the Home Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Displaying disc information on-screen . . . . . . . . . . . 35
08 Copying and back-up
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
One Touch Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Using Copy Lists. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Using disc back-up. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
09 Editing
The Disc Navigator screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Command menu panel options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Editing accuracy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
HDD genres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
05 Using the GUIDE Plus+™ electronic
program guide
The GUIDE Plus+™ system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Using the GUIDE Plus+™ system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
GUIDE Plus+™ FAQ and troubleshooting . . . . . . . . 47
10 Using the Jukebox
Copying CDs to the HDD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Playing music from the Jukebox. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Editing Jukebox albums . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
4
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
11 The PhotoViewer
Playing a slideshow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
12 The Disc Setup menu
Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Basic settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Initialize settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Finalize settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Optimize HDD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Initialize HDD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
13 The Video/Audio Adjust menu
Setting the picture quality for TV and external
inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Setting the picture quality for disc playback . . . . . . 98
Audio DRC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
14 The Initial Setup menu
Using the Initial Setup menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
15 Additional information
Resetting the recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Setting up the remote to control your TV . . . . . . . . 109
Screen sizes and disc formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Minimum copying times . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Troubleshooting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Frequently asked questions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
About DV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Manual recording modes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Language code list. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Country/Area code list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
On-screen displays and recorder displays . . . . . . . 118
Handling discs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Cleaning the pickup lens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Condensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Hints on installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Glossary. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Index
5
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Before you start
01
CBhaepfteor 1re you start
VR mode
HDD
•
Chase play
Features
Using chase play you can start watching a recording
from the beginning, while continuing to record. For
example, you could set a timer recording for a program
that you’re going to miss the first 15 minutes of, then
start watching while the recorder is still recording the
program 15 minutes ahead of you.
™
•
Built-in GUIDE Plus+ electronic program guide
The GUIDE Plus+™ system is an interactive on-screen TV
programming guide. You can see what’s on TV today and
in the coming week, search TV listings for certain
categories of program or by your own keywords, and even
set the recorder to record programs with the press of a
single button.
•
Simultaneous recording and playback
VR mode
HDD
HDD and DVD playback and recording are completely
independent. For example, you can record a broadcast
program to a recordable DVD, while watching another
recording you already made on the same DVD.
HDD
•
HDD recording
Record up to 711 hours of video (in MN1 mode) on the
DVR-630H-S’s internal 250 GB (gigabyte) hard disk
(HDD). (Up to 455 hours on the DVR-530H-S’s 160 GB
HDD.)
•
On-screen Help
Use the HELP button on the remote control to display a
With both recordable DVD and a high-capacity HDD in
the same recorder, you have the flexibility to keep
recordings on the HDD for quick access anytime, or
record to DVD for archiving or playing on other DVD
players.
help screen for the current operation.
•
Disc Navigator
The on-screen Disc Navigator makes finding your way
around the contents of a disc or the HDD easy. For
recordable DVD and HDD content, moving thumbnail
images are displayed for ease of use. The Disc Navigator
is also where you can edit HDD and recordable DVD
content.
•
Copy between HDD and DVD
You can quickly and easily copy recordings between the
HDD and DVD. When copying to DVD you can usually
use the high-speed copy feature, which can copy an hour
of video in about one minute (when recorded in SEP
mode using a DVD-R Ver. 2.0 / 2.1 (16x) disc).
•
Home Menu
The Home Menu gives you on-screen access to all the
recorder’s features in one convenient place, from setting
up the recorder, to programming a timer recording and
editing a recording.
You can also choose to copy material at a different
recording quality from the original. For example, you
might want to copy an XP mode (highest quality)
recording on the HDD to SP (standard play) quality on a
DVD so that you can fit other recordings on the same
disc.
•
Progressive scan-compatible
Compared to standard interlaced video, progressive scan
effectively doubles the amount of video information fed to
your TV or monitor. The result is a stable, flicker-free
image. (Check your TV/monitor for compatibility with this
feature.)
•
One Touch Copy
One Touch Copy makes copying the currently playing title
from HDD to DVD, or DVD to HDD as simple as pressing
a button.
•
Cinema-style surround sound in your home
Connect this recorder to a Dolby Digital and/or DTS-
compatible AV amp/receiver to enjoy full surround sound
effects from Dolby Digital and DTS DVD discs.
•
High quality, real-time copying
When recording to the HDD, picture quality data is also
stored so that picture quality can be optimized when
making real-time copies to DVD later.
•
Easy Timer Recording
Setting the recorder to record a program is simple from
the Easy Timer Recording screen. Set the channel to
record and the recording quality, then graphically set the
start and end times of the recording. That’s it!
(This is applicable only to MN16–32 HDD recordings
(Video Mode Off), or MN12–32 / XP+ recordings (Video
Mode On).
6
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Before you start
01
•
Program up to 32 timer recordings
VR mode
•
Safe, non-destructive editing
You can program the recorder to record up to 32
programs, up to a month in advance. As well as single
programs, you can specify daily or weekly recordings,
too.
When editing Play List content, the actual content of the
disc (the Original content) is not touched. The edited
version (the Play List content) just points to various parts
of the Original content.
This recorder is also compatible with VPS/PDC systems,
which ensure you don’t miss a timer recording, even if
the broadcast is not running to schedule.
•
Play Video mode recordings on a regular DVD
Video mode
player
Discs recorded using the Video mode can be played back
•
One Touch Recording
on regular DVD players, including computer DVD drives
Use One Touch Recording to start recording immediately
in 30 minute blocks. Each time you press the ì REC
button, the recording time is extended by another 30
minutes, up to six hours.
*
compatible with DVD-Video playback .
* ‘DVD-Video format’ recording: The use of the DVD-Video format for
recording on DVD-R and DVD-RW discs is referred to as recording in
‘Video mode’ on Pioneer’s DVD recorders. Supporting playback of DVD-
R / DVD-RW discs is optional for manufacturers of DVD playback
equipment, and there is DVD playback equipment that does not play
DVD-R or DVD-RW discs recorded in the DVD-Video format.
Note: ‘Finalization’ is required.
•
Optimized recording
Optimized recording adjusts the recording quality
automatically if a timer recording will not fit onto a disc
with the settings that you made.
•
WMA, MP3 and JPEG file playback
HDD
This recorder can play WMA and MP3 audio files and
•
Super high quality HDD recording
JPEG picture files on CD-R, CD-RW or CD-ROM discs.
Using the XP+ recording mode you can record super
high quality video (around 15 Mbps data transfer rate) to
the HDD.
•
Disc Back-up
The disc back-up feature gives you a convenient way to
back-up important material on a finalized Video mode
DVD to another recordable DVD disc. The material is first
copied to the HDD, then on to a second DVD disc.
•
High quality 16-bit Linear PCM audio
In the LPCM recording mode, audio is recorded in
uncompressed 16-bit Linear PCM format. This delivers
great sounding audio to accompany the high picture
quality.
HDD
•
Recovery Recording
When a timer recording is set to use DVD but the disc
loaded at the time of the recording is unrecordable, the
program will automatically be recorded to the HDD.
•
Picture quality adjustment features
During playback, you can adjust various picture quality
settings to improve the picture. You can also adjust the
recording picture quality. For example, if you want to
make a DVD copy of an old video tape, you can optimize
the picture quality before transferring it to disc.
HDD
•
Auto Replace Recording
This feature is useful for regular timer recordings of a TV
program which you don’t want to keep after watching.
Each time the program is recorded, it replaces the one
currently on the HDD. There’s no need to manually delete
it later.
•
Find what you want to watch quickly and easily
Unlike video tape that needs to be wound to the correct
place, you can jump right to the part of a DVD disc or the
HDD that you want to watch. Search for a point on a disc
by title, chapter or time.
Note on copying:
•
Manual recording
Recording equipment should be used only for lawful copying and you
are advised to check carefully what is lawful copying in the country in
which you are making a copy. Copying of copyright material such as
films or music is unlawful unless permitted by a legal exception or
consented to by the rightowners.
In addition to six preset recording quality modes, the
manual recording mode allows you to access 34 different
recording quality/time settings, giving you precise
control over the recording.
•
Record from a DV camcorder
This recorder has a built-in DV (Digital Video) input for
connection to a DV camcorder. This makes it ideal for
transferring camcorder footage to DVD or HDD for
editing.
7
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Before you start
What’s in the box
01
Important
Incorrect use of batteries can result in hazards such as
leakage and bursting. Please observe the following:
Please confirm that the following accessories are in the
box when you open it.
• Don’t mix new and old batteries together.
• Remote control
• Don’t use different kinds of batteries together—
although they may look similar, different batteries
may have different voltages.
• AA/R6P dry cell batteries x2
• Audio/video cable (red/white/yellow)
• G-LINK™ cable
• Make sure that the plus and minus ends of each
battery match the indications in the battery
compartment.
• RF antenna cable
• Power cable
• Remove batteries from equipment that isn’t going to
be used for a month or more.
• These operating instructions
• Warranty card
• When disposing of used batteries, please comply
with governmental regulations or environmental
public instruction’s rules that apply in your country or
area.
Putting the batteries in the remote
control
1
Open the battery compartment cover on the
Using the remote control
back of the remote control.
Please keep in mind the following when using the remote
control:
• Make sure that there are no obstacles between the
remote and the remote sensor on the unit.
• Remote operation may become unreliable if strong
sunlight or fluorescent light is shining on the unit’s
remote sensor.
2
Insert two AA/R6P batteries into the battery
compartment following the indications (ꢀ,ꢁ) inside
the compartment.
• Remote controllers for different devices can interfere
with each other. Avoid using remotes for other
equipment located close to this unit.
• Replace the batteries when you notice a fall off in the
operating range of the remote.
• When the batteries run down or you change the
batteries, the remote control mode and TV preset
codes are automatically reset. See Remote Control
Mode on page 106 and Setting up the remote to
control your TV on page 109 to reset them.
3
Close the cover.
• Use within the operating range in front of the remote
control sensor on the front panel, as shown.
7 m
• You can control this recorder using the remote
sensor of another Pioneer component using the
CONTROL IN jack on the rear panel. See Rear panel
connections on page 12 for more information.
8
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Before you start
01
Note that older models of DVD recorders and DVD
writers may reject DVD-RW Ver. 1.2 discs and/or corrupt
the data on the disc. If you want to share DVD-RW discs
between this recorder and an older recorder/writer, we
recommend using Ver. 1.1 discs.
Disc / content format playback
compatibility
The following table shows older Pioneer DVD recorders’
limited compatibility with DVD-RW Ver. 1.2 discs.
General disc compatibility
This recorder is compatible with a wide range of disc
types (media) and formats. Playable discs will generally
feature one of the following logos on the disc and/or disc
packaging. Note however that some disc types, such as
recordable CD and DVD, may be in an unplayable
format—see below for further compatibility information.
Model
Playable
Yes1,2,3
Yes1
Recordable
DVR-7000
No
DVR-3100/ DVR-5100H
No
1 Discs should be finalized in this recorder before playing. Unfinalized
VR mode and Video mode discs may not play.
2 Cannot read the CPRM information will show in the display when
DVD-Video
DVD-R
DVD-RW
you load a disc. However, this will not affect playback.
3 Copy-once protected disc titles will not play.
CD-R/RW compatibility
Audio CD
Video CD
CD-R
CD-RW
This recorder cannot record CD-R or CD-RW discs.
• Readable formats: CD-Audio, Video CD/Super VCD,
ISO 9660 CD-ROM* containing MP3, WMA or JPEG
files
* ISO 9660 Level 1 or 2 compliant. CD physical format:
Mode1, Mode2 XA Form1. Romeo and Joliet file
systems are both compatible with this recorder.
• Also compatible with KODAK Picture CD
•
is a trademark of DVD Format/Logo Licensing
Corporation.
• Multi-session playback: Yes (except CD-Audio and
Video CD/Super VCD)
•
is a trademark of Fuji Photo Film Co. Ltd.
This recorder also supports the IEC’s Super VCD
standard. Compared to the Video CD standard, Super
VCD offers superior picture quality, and allows two
soundtracks to be recorded. Super VCD also supports the
widescreen size.
• Unfinalized disc playback: CD-Audio only
Compressed audio compatibility
• Compatible media: CD-ROM, CD-R, CD-RW
• Compatible formats: MPEG-1 Audio Layer 3 (MP3),
Windows Media Audio (WMA)
VIDEO
CD
• Sampling rates: 44.1 or 48kHz
Super Video CD (Super VCD)
• Bit-rates: Any (128Kbps or higher recommended)
• Variable bit-rate (VBR) MP3 playback: Yes
• VBR WMA playback: No
DVD-R/RW compatibility
This recorder will play and record DVD-R/RW discs.
• WMA encoder compatibility: Windows Media Codec
8 (files encoded using Windows Media Codec 9 may be
playable but some parts of the specification are not
supported; specifically, Pro, Lossless, Voice and VBR)
Compatible media:
• DVD-RW Ver. 1.1, Ver. 1.1 / 2x, Ver. 1.2 / 2–4x and Ver.
1.2 / 2–6x
• DRM (Digital Rights Management) file playback: No
(see also DRM in the Glossary on page 121)
• DVD-R Ver. 2.0 and Ver. 2.0 / 4x / 8x / 16x, and Ver. 2.1
1–8x / 1–16x
• File extensions: .mp3, .wma (these must be used for
the recorder to recognize MP3 and WMA files – do
not use for other file types)
Recording formats:
• DVD-R/RW: Video Recording (VR) format and DVD-
Video format (Video mode)
• File structure: Up to 99 folders / 999 files (if these
limits are exceeded, only files and folders up to these
limits are playable)
Readable formats:
• DVD-R/RW: Video Recording (VR) format and DVD-
Video format (Video mode)
9
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Before you start
01
WMA (Windows Media Audio) compatibility
Frequently asked questions
• What’s the difference between DVD-R and DVD-RW?
The most important difference between DVD-R and
DVD-RW is that DVD-R is a record-once medium,
while DVD-RW is a re-recordable/erasable medium.
You can re-record/erase a DVD-RW disc
approximately 1,000 times.
®
The Windows Media logo printed on the box indicates
For more information, see About DVD recording on
page 49.
that this recorder can playback Windows Media Audio
content.
WMA is an acronym for Windows Media Audio and refers
to an audio compression technology developed by
Microsoft Corporation. WMA content can be encoded by
• What’s VR mode?
VR (Video Recording) mode is a special mode
designed for home DVD recording. It allows flexible
editing of recorded material compared to ‘Video
mode’. On the other hand, Video mode discs are
more compatible with other DVD players.
®
®
using Windows Media Player for Windows XP,
®
®
Windows Media Player 9 or Windows Media Player 10
series.
Microsoft, Windows Media, and the Windows logo are
trademarks, or registered trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
• How do I change the format of a disc?
Both DVD-R and DVD-RW discs can be initialized for
Video mode or VR mode recording. DVD-R discs are
ready for Video mode recording when you first load
them into the recorder. You can, however, initialize
them for VR mode recording from the Disc Setup
menu.
JPEG file compatibility
• Compatible formats: Baseline JPEG and EXIF 2.2*
still image files
*File format used by digital still cameras
• Sampling ratio: 4:4:4, 4:2:2, 4:2:0
• Horizontal resolution: 160 – 5120 pixels
• Vertical resolution: 120 – 3840 pixels
• Progressive JPEG compatible: No
DVD-RW discs can be initialized and re-initialized for
either mode at any time (although initializing will
erase all the data on the disc).
• Can I play my recordable discs in a regular DVD player?
• File extensions: .jpg, .jpeg, .jif, .jfif (must be used for
the recorder to recognize JPEG files – do not use for
other file types)
Generally, DVD-R discs and DVD-RW discs recorded
in Video mode* are playable in a standard DVD
player, but they must be ‘finalized’ first. This process
fixes the contents of the disc to make them readable
to other DVD players as DVD-Video discs.
• File structure: The recorder can load up to 99 folders
/ 999 files at one time (if there are more files/folders
that this on the disc then more can be reloaded)
DVD-R discs recorded in VR mode are not playable in
standard DVD players, but may be playable in other
DVD recorders and DVD-ROM drives (in the case of
DVD-ROM drives, the disc will need to be finalized
first).
PC-created disc compatibility
Discs recorded using a personal computer may not be
playable in this unit due to the setting of the application
software used to create the disc. In these particular
instances, check with the software publisher for more
detailed information.
DVD-RW discs recorded in VR mode are playable in
some players and other recorders.
Discs recorded in packet write mode (UDF format) are
not compatible with this recorder.
Note that discs may not play due to recording or disc
characteristics, scratches or dirt on the disc or pickup
lens, etc.
Check the DVD-R/RW or CD-R/RW software disc boxes
for additional compatibility information.
This label indicates playback compatibility with
DVD-RW discs recorded in VR mode (Video
Recording format). However, for discs recorded with
a record-only-once encrypted program, playback can
only be achieved using a CPRM compatible device.
Note that Pioneer cannot guarantee that discs
recorded using this recorder will play on other players.
10
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Before you start
01
*
Please use the recorder following the guidelines below to
protect against possible HDD failure.
‘DVD-Video format’ recording: The use of the DVD-
Video format for recording on DVD-R and DVD-RW discs
is referred to as recording in ‘Video mode’ on Pioneer’s
DVD recorders. Supporting playback of DVD-R / DVD-
RW discs is optional for manufacturers of DVD
playback equipment, and there is DVD playback
equipment that does not play DVD-R or DVD-RW discs
recorded in the DVD-Video format.
The HDD should not be regarded as a place to store
recordings permanently. We recommend that you back up
your important recordings onto DVD-R/RW discs in order to
protect against accidental loss.
Pioneer cannot under any circumstances accept
resposibility for any direct or indirect loss arising from any
inconvenience or loss of recorded material resulting from
HDD failure.
Note: ‘Finalization’ is required.
This recorder supports the recording of ‘copy-once’
broadcast programs using the CPRM copy protection
system (see CPRM on page 50) on CPRM-compliant
discs in VR mode. CPRM recordings can only be played
on players that are specifically compatible with CPRM.
• Do not move the recorder while it is on (this includes
during EPG download when the display shows EPG).
• Install and use the recorder on a stable, level surface.
• Do not block the rear vent/cooling fan.
• Do I need two DVD recorders for editing? What kind of
editing can I do?
• Do not use the recorder in excessively hot or humid
places, or in places that may be subject to sudden
changes in temperature. Sudden changes in
temperature can cause condensation to form inside
the recorder. This can be a cause of HDD failure.
Unlike editing video tape, you only need one DVD
recorder to edit discs. With VR mode discs, you can
edit by making a ‘Play List’ of what to play and when
to play it. On playback, the recorder plays the disc
according to the Play List.
• While the recorder is switched on (including during
EPG download when the display shows EPG), do not
unplug from the wall socket or switch the electricity
off from the breaker switch.
Original
Title 1
Title 2
Title 3
• Do not move the recorder immediately after
switching it off. If you need to move the recorder,
please follow the steps below:
Chapter 1
Chapter 2
Chapter 3 Chapter 1
Chapter 1
Chapter 2
1 After the message POWER OFF is shown in the
display, wait at least two minutes.
2 Unplug from the wall socket.
3 Move the recorder.
Title 1
Title 2
• If there’s a power failure while the recorder is on
there is a chance that some data on the HDD will be
lost.
Chapter 1
Chapter 2
Chapter 1 Chapter 2
Play List
• The HDD is very delicate. If used improperly or in an
unsuitable environment, it is possible that the HDD
will fail after a few years of use. Signs of problems
include playback unexpectedly freezing and
Throughout this manual, you will often see the words
Original and Play List to refer to the actual content
and the edited version.
noticeable block noise (mosaic) in the picture.
However, sometimes there will be no warning signs
of HDD failure. If the HDD fails, no playback of
recorded material will be possible. In this case it will
be necessary to replace the HDD unit.
• Original content refers to what’s actually recorded
on the disc.
• Play List content refers to the edited version of the
disc—how the Original content is to be played.
Optimizing HDD performance
About the internal hard disk drive
As you record and edit material on the HDD, the data on
the disk becomes fragmented, eventually affecting the
recorder’s performance. Before this happens, the
recorder will warn you that it is time to optimize the HDD
(which you can do from the Disc Setup menu; see
Optimize HDD on page 96).
The internal hard disk drive (HDD) is a fragile piece of
equipment. Depending on the conditions under which it
is used, or through careless use, it is possible that the
recorded contents will be damaged or lost completely, or
that normal playback and recording will not be possible.
Please understand that in the event of repair or
replacement of the HDD or related components, all your
HDD recordings will be lost.
11
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting up
02
Chapter 2
Connecting up
Rear panel connections
1
2
3
4
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT
Y
P
B
IN
AC IN
OUT
ANTENNA
AV 2 (INPUT 1/DECODER)
L
AV 1 (RGB) – TV
L
R
R
G-LINK CONTROL
DIGITAL
OUT
OPTICAL
P
R
IN
AUDIO
VIDEO
INPUT 3
AUDIO
VIDEO
OUTPUT
S-VIDEO
S-VIDEO
5
6
7
8
9
10
1
AV2(INPUT 1/DECODER) AV connector
8
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT
Audio/video input/output SCART-type AV connector for
connecting to a VCR, or other equipment with a SCART
connector. The input accepts video, S-video and RGB.
See AV2/L1 In on page 102 for how to set this up.
Optical digital audio jack for connecting to an AV
amplifier/receiver, Dolby Digital/DTS/MPEG decoder or
other equipment with a digital input.
9
INPUT 3
2
AV1(RGB)-TV AV connector
Stereo analog audio, video and S-video inputs for
connection to a VCR or other source component.
Audio/video output SCART-type AV connector for
connecting to a TV or other equipment with a SCART
connector. The video output is switchable between video,
S-video and RGB. See page AV1 Out on page 102 for how
to set this up.
10 OUTPUT
Stereo analog audio, video and S-video outputs for
connection to a TV or AV amplifier/receiver.
3
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT
A high-quality video output for connecting to a TV or
Front panel connections
monitor with a component video input.
4
ANTENNA IN (RF IN)/OUT
Connect your TV antenna to the ANTENNA IN (RF IN)
jack. The signal is passed through to the ANTENNA OUT
jack for connection to your TV.
DV IN
S-VIDEO VIDEO L(MONO)
R
AUDIO
5
AC IN – Power inlet
INPUT 2
6
G-LINK™
11
12
Use to connect the supplied G-LINK™ cable to enable
GUIDE Plus+™ to control an external satellite receiver,
etc.
On the right side of the front panel a flip-down cover
hides more connections.
7
CONTROL IN
11 DV IN
Use to control this recorder from the remote sensor of
another Pioneer component with a CONTROL OUT
terminal and bearing the Pioneer ꢂ mark. Connect the
CONTROL OUT of the other component to the CONTROL
IN of this recorder using a mini-plug cord.
A DV input i.LINK connector, suitable for connecting a
DV camcorder.
12 Audio/video input 2
Audio/video input (stereo analog audio; composite and
S-video video), especially suitable for camcorders, game
consoles, portable audio, etc.
12
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting up
02
Extra features for use with
compatible TVs
When this recorder is connected to a TV that features i/o
Link. A, AV Link, T-V Link, EasyLink, MegaLogic,
SMARTLINK, Q-Link, DATA LOGIC or NexTView Link
using a fully-wired 21-pin SCART cable (not supplied), the
following functions are available:
• Direct TV recording
• Channel preset download
• NexTView timer programming download
• TV auto power on
• System configuration
Note that these functions cannot be used when the front
panel display shows EPG.
For further details and compatibility information, see also
the manual that came with your TV.
Direct TV recording
Direct TV recording allows you to record the TV program
that you’re watching, without having to worry about
whether this recorder is set to the same channel. See
Direct recording from TV on page 52 for more on this
feature.
Channel preset download
This feature allows you to set up the channel presets of
this recorder very simply using the channel presets and
preset names already in your TV. See Switching on and
setting up on page 25 and Auto Channel Setting on
page 101 for more on this feature.
NexTView timer programming download
NexTView timer programming download allows you to
program a timer recording directly from the NexTView
electronic program guide displayed on your TV.
See the manual that came with your TV for more
information on how to use this feature. Note that the SP
and LP options displayed on your TV correspond to the SP
and LP recording modes on this recorder.
TV auto power on
When you play a disc in this recorder, the TV
automatically turns on and switches to the correct video
input. See the manual that came with your TV for how to
use this feature.
System configuration
Basic settings, including language, country and TV
screen size (aspect ratio), can be downloaded from your
TV to help set up this recorder for use.
13
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting up
02
Easy connections
The setup described below is a basic setup that allows you to watch and record TV programs, and play discs. Other
types of connections are explained starting on the following page.
Important
• These connections use SCART cables (not supplied). If your TV (or VCR) does not have a SCART connection, see
the following page for connecting up using the supplied audio/video cable.
• The AV1(RGB)-TV AV connector can output ordinary (composite), S-video or RGB video, plus stereo analog audio.
The AV2(INPUT 1/DECODER) connector accepts ordinary, S-video and RGB video input, as well as stereo analog
audio. See AV1 Out on page 102 and AV2/L1 In on page 102 for how to set them up.
• Before making or changing any rear panel connections, make sure that all components are switched off and
unplugged from the wall outlet.
1
Connect the cable from the antenna/cable TV
outlet to the antenna input on your VCR.
• If you are not connecting a VCR in the chain, connect
it to the ANTENNA IN (RF IN) jack on this recorder
and skip the next step.
SCART AV
CONNECTOR
ANTENNA
IN
2
Use an RF antenna cable (one is supplied) to
3
connect the antenna output of your VCR to the
ANTENNA IN (RF IN) of this recorder.
TV
ANTENNA
OUT
4
3
Use another RF antenna cable to connect the
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT
Y
P
B
AC IN
IN
OUT
ANTENNA
ANTENNA OUT of this recorder to the antenna input
on your TV.
AV
2
(INPUT 1/DECODER)
AV
1
(RGB)
L
–
TV
G-LINK CONTROL
IN
DIGITAL
OUT
OPTICAL
R
R
P
R
AUDIO
VIDEO
S-VIDEO
S-VIDEO
OUTPUT
ANTENNA
IN (RF IN)
4
Use a SCART cable (not supplied) to connect the
5
AV1(RGB)-TV AV connector on this recorder to the
SCART AV connector on your TV.
2
5
Use another SCART cable to connect the
SCART AV
CONNECTOR
AV2(INPUT 1/DECODER) AV connector to a SCART AV
connector on your VCR.
ANTENNA
OUT
VCR
ANTENNA
IN
Tip
• This recorder has a ‘through’ function which allows
you to record a TV program from the built-in TV tuner
in this recorder while watching a video playing on
your VCR. (To use this feature when the recorder is in
standby, Power Save must be set to Off—see Power
Save on page 100).
1
Antenna/cable TV
wall outlet
14
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting up
02
Using other types of audio/video output
If you can’t use the SCART AV connector to connect your TV to this recorder, there are standard audio/video output
jacks, as well as an S-video and component video output.
Using the supplied audio/video cable
Using the S-video or component video
output
AUDIO
INPUT
COMPONENT
VIDEO INPUT
AUDIO
INPUT
VIDEO
INPUT
S-VIDEO
INPUT
TV
1
2
TV
2
1
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT
Y
P
B
AC IN
IN
OUT
ANTENNA
AV
2
(INPUT 1/DECODER)
L
AV
1
RGB)
L
–
TV
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT
G-LINK CONTROL
IN
DIGITAL
OUT
OPTICAL
R
R
Y
P
B
AC IN
IN
OUT
ANTENNA
AV
2
(INPUT 1/DECODER)
L
AV
1
RGB)
L
–
TV
G-LINK CONTROL
IN
DIGITAL
OUT
OPTICAL
R
R
P
R
AUDIO
VIDEO
INPUT
AUDIO
VIDEO
S-VIDEO
S-VIDEO
3
OUTPUT
P
R
AUDIO
VIDEO
INPUT
AUDIO
VIDEO
S-VIDEO
S-VIDEO
3
OUTPUT
1
Connect the VIDEO OUTPUT jack to a video input
1
Connect the S-video or component video output
on your TV.
to a similar input on your TV.
Use the yellow jack of the supplied audio/video cable for
the video connection.
For an S-video connection, use an S-video cable (not
supplied) to connect the S-VIDEO OUTPUT jack to an S-
video input on your TV
2
Connect the AUDIO OUTPUT jacks to the
corresponding audio inputs on your TV.
Use the red and white jacks of the supplied audio/video
cable for the audio connection. Make sure you match up
the left and right outputs with their corresponding inputs
for correct stereo sound.
For a component video connection, use a component
video cable (not supplied) to connect the COMPONENT
VIDEO OUT jacks to a component video input on your TV.
See also Component Video Out on page 101 for how to set
up the component video output for use with a progressive
scan-compatible TV.
2
Connect the AUDIO OUTPUT jacks to the
corresponding audio inputs on your TV.
You can use the supplied audio/video cable, leaving the
yellow video plug disconnected. Make sure you match up
the left and right outputs with their corresponding inputs
for correct stereo sound.
15
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting up
02
Connecting to a cable box, satellite receiver or digital terrestrial receiver
If you have a cable, satellite or digital terrestrial receiver with a built-in decoder, connect it to this recorder and your TV
1
as shown on this page. If you are using a separate decoder box for your cable/satellite TV, set up following the
instructions on the next page.
Using the setup on this page you can:
• Record any channel by selecting it on the cable box, satellite receiver or digital terrestrial receiver.
• Change channels and set timer recordings on the external receiver using the GUIDE Plus+™ system (via the
G-LINK™ cable, and after setting up).
Important
• Do not connect this recorder to your TV ‘through’ your VCR, satellite receiver or other component. Always connect
each component directly to your TV or AV amplifier/receiver.
4
Plug the supplied G-LINK™ cable to the G-LINK™
jack.
SCART AV
CONNECTOR
This enables you to control the tuner in the external
receiver using the GUIDE Plus+™ system.
ANTENNA
IN
Position the IR transmitter end of the G-LINK™ cable so
that the IR receiver on your cable/satellite/digital
terrestrial receiver will pick up the control signals (see
diagram).
2
TV
1
ANTENNA
OUT
G-LINK CONTROL
IN
DIGITAL
OUT
OPTICAL
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT
Y
P
B
AC IN
IN
OUT
ANTENNA
AV
2
(INPUT 1/DECODER)
L
AV
1
(RGB)
L
–
TV
G-LINK CONTROL
IN
DIGITAL
OUT
OPTICAL
R
R
P
R
AUDIO
VIDEO
S-VIDEO
S-VIDEO
OUTPUT
ANTENNA
IN (RF IN)
3
4
1
G-LINK cable
SCART AV
CONNECTOR
See the manual that came with your cable/satellite/
digital terrestrial receiver if you’re not sure where the IR
receiver is on the front panel. Alternatively, experiment
with the remote control, operating it from very close
range until you find the place where the receiver
responds.
ANTENNA
OUT
Cable/Satellite/
Digital Terrestrial
receiver
ANTENNA
IN
Satellite dish/
antenna/cable TV
wall outlet
1
1
Connect RF antenna cables as shown.
Tip
This enables you to watch and record TV channels.
• This recorder has a ‘through’ function which allows
you to record a TV program from the built-in TV tuner
in this recorder while watching a video playing on
your VCR. (To use this feature when the recorder is in
standby, Power Save must be set to Off—see Power
Save on page 100).
2
Use a SCART cable (not supplied) to connect the
AV1(RGB)-TV AV connector to a SCART AV connector
on your TV.
This enables you to watch discs.
3
Use another SCART cable to connect the
AV2(INPUT 1/DECODER) AV connector to a SCART AV
connector on your cable box/satellite/digital
terrestrial receiver.
This enables you to record scrambled TV channels.
Note
1 The diagram shows SCART video connections, but you can alternatively use any of the other audio/video connections.
16
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting up
02
Connecting an external decoder box (1)
If you have an external, dedicated decoder box for your satellite or cable TV system, use the setup described on this
page. See the previous page for how to connect the G-LINK™ cable.
Important
• Do not connect your decoder box directly to this recorder.
• Information from the decoder (for example, relating to pay TV services), is only viewable when this recorder is off
(in standby).
• For timer recording to work properly on this recorder, the VCR/satellite receiver/cable box must also be switched
on during recording.
• It is not possible to watch one TV program and record another using this setup.
1
Connect the cable from the antenna/cable TV
outlet to the antenna input on your VCR/satellite
receiver/cable box.
SCART AV
CONNECTOR
2
Use a SCART cable (not supplied) to connect your
decoder to your VCR/satellite receiver/cable box.
See the manual for your decoder box for more detailed
instructions.
4
TV
3
Use a SCART cable to connect your VCR/satellite
receiver/cable box to the AV2(INPUT 1/DECODER)
AV connector on this recorder.
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT
Y
P
B
AC IN
IN
OUT
ANTENNA
AV
2
(INPUT 1/DECODER)
L
AV
1
(RGB)
L
–
TV
G-LINK CONTROL
IN
DIGITAL
OUT
OPTICAL
R
R
P
R
4
Use a SCART cable to connect the AV1(RGB)-TV
AUDIO
VIDEO
S-VIDEO
S-VIDEO
OUTPUT
AV connector to your TV.
3
2
SCART AV
CONNECTOR
SCART AV
CONNECTOR
Decoder
VCR/Satellite receiver
/Cable box
ANTENNA
IN
1
Antenna/cable TV
wall outlet
17
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting up
02
Connecting an external decoder box (2)
If you only have a decoder, connect it to this recorder and your TV as shown on this page.
Using the setup on this page you can:
1
• Record scrambled channels received using the recorder’s built-in TV tuner.
Important
• Do not connect this recorder ‘through’ your VCR, satellite receiver or cable box. Always connect each component
directly to your TV or AV amplifier/receiver.
1
Connect RF antenna cables as shown.
This enables you to watch and record TV channels.
SCART AV
CONNECTOR
2
Use a SCART cable (not supplied) to connect the
ANTENNA
IN
AV1(RGB)-TV AV connector to a SCART AV connector
on your TV.
This enables you to watch discs.
2
TV
1
3
Use another SCART cable to connect the
ANTENNA
OUT
AV2(INPUT 1/DECODER) AV connector to a SCART AV
connector on your decoder box.
This enables you to record scrambled TV channels.
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT
Y
PB
AC IN
IN
OUT
ANTENNA
AV
2
(INPUT 1/DECODER)
L
AV
1
(RGB)
L
–
TV
G-LINK CONTROL
IN
DIGITAL
OUT
OPTICAL
R
PR
AUDIO
VIDEO
S-VIDEO
S-VIDEO
OUTPUT
ANTENNA
IN (RF IN)
1
3
SCART AV
CONNECTOR
Antenna/cable TV
wall outlet
Decoder
Note
1 In order to use this setup, you will need to make the following settings from the Initial Setup menu:
• Set the AV2/L1 In setting to Decoder from the Initial Setup menu (see AV2/L1 In on page 102).
• From the Manual CH Setting screen, set the Decoder setting for the scrambled channels to On (see Manual CH Setting on page 101).
18
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting up
02
Connecting to an AV amplifier/receiver
To enjoy multichannel surround sound you need to connect this recorder to an AV amplifier/receiver using the digital
optical output.
In addition to a digital connection, we recommend also connecting using the stereo analog connection for
compatibility with all discs and sources.
You’ll probably also want to connect a video output to your AV amplifier/receiver. Use the ordinary video output (as
shown here), or the S-video output.
Important
• Noise may be output from your speakers if the recorder is not set up to work with your AV amplifier/receiver
properly (see Audio Out Settings on page 103).
ANTENNA
IN
VIDEO
IN
TV
1
4
VIDEO
OUT
AUDIO/VIDEO
IN
DIGITAL
IN
AV amp/
receiver
2
ANTENNA
OUT
3
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT
Y
P
B
AC IN
IN
OUT
ANTENNA
AV
2
(INPUT 1/DECODER)
L
AV
1
(RGB)
L
–
TV
G-LINK CONTROL
IN
DIGITAL
OUT
OPTICAL
R
R
P
R
AUDIO
VIDEO
INPUT
AUDIO
VIDEO
S-VIDEO
S-VIDEO
3
OUTPUT
ANTENNA
IN (RF IN)
1
Antenna/cable TV
wall outlet
1
Connect RF antenna cables as shown.
Important
This enables you to watch and record TV channels.
• Do not connect this recorder to your TV ‘through’
your VCR using A/V cables. Always connect it directly
to your TV.
2
Connect one of the DIGITAL OUT OPTICAL jack on
this recorder to an optical digital input on your AV
amplifier/receiver.
This enables you to listen to multichannel surround
sound.
3
Connect the analog AUDIO OUTPUT and VIDEO
OUTPUT jacks on this recorder to an analog audio
and video input on your AV amplifier/receiver.
4
Connect the AV amplifier/receiver’s video output
to a video input on your TV.
19
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting up
02
Connecting a DV camcorder
Using the front panel DV IN jack, it is possible to connect
a DV camcorder or video deck, or DVD-R/RW recorder
and digitally transfer DV tapes or DVD-R/RW discs to
DVD-R/RW.
Connecting other AV sources
Connecting a VCR or analog camcorder
OPEN/CLOSE
HDD/DVD
PULL-OPEN
REC
STANDBY/ON
Important
AUDIO/VIDEO
OUTPUT
AUDIO/VIDEO
INPUT
• This jack is for connection to DV equipment only. It is
not compatible with digital satellite receivers or D-
VHS video decks.
1
2
OPEN/CLOSE
HDD/DVD
PULL-OPEN
REC
STANDBY/ON
DV
IN
Analog camcorder
AUDIO/VIDEO
INPUT
AUDIO/VIDEO
OUTPUT
DV
OUT
VCR
DV camcorder
1
Connect a set of audio and video inputs of your
VCR or camcorder to a set of outputs on this
recorder.
This enables you to record from this recorder to your VCR
1
Use a DV cable (not supplied) to connect the DV
jack of your DV camcorder/video deck to the front
panel DV IN jack of this recorder.
or camcorder.
• You can use standard video or S-video cables for the
video connection.
Plugging in
• Alternatively, you can use the AV2(INPUT 1/
DECODER) SCART connector for audio/video input
and output with just one SCART cable.
After checking all the connections, plug in the recorder.
1
Use the supplied power cable to connect this
recorder to a power outlet.
2
Connect a set of audio and video outputs of your
VCR or camcorder to a set of inputs on this recorder.
This enables you to record tapes from your VCR or
camcorder.
• You can use standard video or S-video cables for the
video connection.
• The front panel connections make convenient
connections for a camcorder input.
20
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Controls and displays
03
CChaoptnert3rols and displays
Front panel
1
2
3
4
5
6
OPEN/CLOSE
HDD/DVD
PULL-OPEN
ONE TOUCH COPY
REC
STANDBY/ON
13 12 11 10
9
8
7
1
ꢃ STANDBY/ON
8
+/–
Press to switch the recorder on/into standby.
Use to change channels, skip chapters/tracks, etc.
2
3
Disc tray
9 ì REC
Press to start recording. Press repeatedly to set the
recording time in 30 minute blocks.
ꢄ OPEN/CLOSE
Press to open/close the disc tray.
10 ꢀ
4
HDD/DVD indicator
Press to stop recording.
Lights blue when the HDD is selected; orange when DVD
is selected.
11 ONE TOUCH COPY (page 71)
Press to start One Touch Copy of the currently playing
title to DVD or the HDD. See also the Note on copying on
page 7.
5
HDD/DVD
Press to switch between the hard disk drive (HDD) and
DVD for recording and playback.
12 ꢅ
6
Front panel display and IR remote sensor
Press to stop playback.
See Display on page 24 for details.
13 ꢆ
7
Front panel inputs (page 12)
Press to start or restart playback.
Pull the cover down where indicated to access the front
panel input jacks (audio, video and DV). Especially
convenient for connecting camcorders and other
portable equipment.
21
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Controls and displays
03
6
DVD (page 30)
Press to select the DVD for recording or playback.
Remote control
7
INPUT SELECT (page 57)
Press to change the input to use for recording.
1
2
STANDBY/ON ONE TOUCH
COPY
OPEN/CLOSE
8
Alphanumeric buttons, + and CLEAR
ꢄ
3
5
ꢃ
4
6
7
Use the number buttons for track/chapter/title selection;
channel selection, and so on. The same buttons can also
be used to enter names for titles, discs and so on.
HDD
DVD
INPUT
SELECT
ABC
DEF
MNO
WXYZ
Use the + button to enter non-alphanumeric characters
and symbols.
GHI
PQRS
+
JKL
8
TUV
CH
9
Use CLEAR to clear an entry and start again.
CLEAR
CLEAR
9
CH +/– (page 31)
AUDIO
SUBTITLE
ANGLE
PLAY MODE
MENU
10
11
Press to change the channel of the built-in TV tuner.
DISC NAVIGATOR
12
10 GUIDE Plus+™ Action buttons and DVD playback
functions
TOP MENU
ENTER
13
When in the GUIDE Plus+™ system, these buttons
act as the Red, Green, Yellow and Blue Action
buttons (the functions of these buttons change
according to the GUIDE Plus+™ Area. (page 38)
HOME
MENU
RETURN
15
18
14
16
17
GUIDE
INFO
HELP
DISPLAY
REV SCAN
PLAY
FWD SCAN
AUDIO (page 31, 69)
PAUSE STOP OK
BACK CM SKIP
Changes the audio language or channel. (When the
recorder is stopped, press to change the tuner
audio.)
19
CASE
SELECTION
NEXT
PREV
REC
STEP/SLOW
ꢈ
ꢇ
STOP REC REC MODE TIMER REC
20
21
ì
SUBTITLE (page 68)
Displays/changes the subtitles included in
multilingual DVD-Video discs.
TV CONTROL
TV/DVD
ꢃ
INPUT
SELECT
22
23
TV DIRECT
CHANNEL
VOLUME
REC
ANGLE (page 70)
Switches camera angles on discs with multi-angle
scenes.
DVD RECORDER
PLAY MODE (page 65)
Press to display the Play Mode menu (for features
such as search, repeat and program play).
1
ONE TOUCH COPY (page 71)
11 DISC NAVIGATOR (page 62, 81) / TOP MENU
(page 33)
Press to display the Disc Navigator screen, or the top
menu if a DVD-Video disc is loaded.
Press to start One Touch Copy of the currently playing
title to DVD or the HDD.
2
Remote control indicator
Lights when setting up the remote control for use with a
TV (page 109) and when setting the remote control mode
(page 106).
12 MENU (page 33)
Press to display the disc menu if a DVD-Video disc is
loaded.
3
ꢃ STANDBY/ON
When in the GUIDE Plus+™ system, use to jump directly
to the Menu bar.
Press to switch the recorder on/into standby.
4
ꢄ OPEN/CLOSE
13 ꢀ/ꢁ/ꢂ/ꢃ and ENTER
Used to navigate all on-screen displays. Press ENTER to
select the currently highlighted option.
Press to open/close the disc tray.
5
HDD (page 30)
Press to select the hard disk (HDD) for recording or
playback.
14 HOME MENU (page 35)
Press to display the Home Menu, from which you can
navigate all the functions of the recorder.
22
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Controls and displays
03
15 RETURN
20 Recording controls (page 30)
Press to go back one level in the on-screen menu or
display.
ì REC
Press to start recording. Press repeatedly to set the
16 GUIDE Plus+™ system controls
recording time in blocks of 30 mins.
GUIDE
ꢀ STOP REC
Press to stop recording.
Press to display the GUIDE Plus+™ screen; press
again to exit.
REC MODE (page 51)
INFO
Press repeatedly to change the recording mode
(picture quality).
Press to see additional information for the
highlighted item in GUIDE Plus+™.
TIMER REC (page 39)
17 HELP
Press to set a timer recording from the GUIDE
Plus+™ system.
Press for help on how to use the current GUI screen.
18 DISPLAY (page 35)
21 TV CONTROL (page 109)
After setting up, use these controls to control your TV.
Displays/changes the on-screen information
displays.
22 TV/DVD (page 32)
19 Playback controls (page 32)
Press to switch between ‘TV mode’, in which you get the
picture and sound from the TV’s tuner, and ‘DVD mode’,
in which you get picture and sound from the recorder’s
tuner (or an external input).
ꢉ REV SCAN / FWD SCAN ꢊ (page 64)
Press to start reverse or forward scanning. Press
again to change the speed.
23 TV DIRECT REC (page 52)
Press to start recording whatever channel your TV is set
to.
ꢆ PLAY
Press to start playback.
ꢋ PAUSE
Press to pause playback or recording.
ꢅ STOP
Press to stop playback.
CM BACK (commercial back)
Press repeatedly to skip progressively backward
through the audio or video playing.
CM SKIP (commercial skip)
Press repeatedly to skip progressively forward
through the audio or video playing.
ꢌ PREV / NEXT ꢍ
Press to skip to the previous or next title/chapter/
track/folder; or to display the previous or next menu
page.
When GUIDE Plus+™ is displayed, use to display the
previous/next page.
ꢈ STEP/SLOW ꢇ (page 64)
During playback, press to start slow-motion
playback; while paused, press to show the previous
or next video frame.
When GUIDE Plus+™ is displayed, use to display the
previous/next day.
23
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Controls and displays
03
Display
1
8
2 3
4
5
L
R
P
7
6
1
ꢆ
5
Recording quality indicators (page 50)
Lights during playback; blinks when playback is paused.
XP
2
ꢄ
Lights when the recording mode is set to XP (best
quality).
Lights when copying.
3
ì
SP
Lights during recording; blinks when recording is
Lights when the recording mode is set to SP
paused.
(standard play).
LP / SLP
4
(page 39)
Lights when the recording mode is set to LP (long
play) or SLP (super long play).
Lights when a timer recording has been set.
(Indicator blinks if the timer has been set to DVD but
there isn’t a recordable disc loaded, or the timer has
been set to HDD but the HDD is not recordable.)
EP / SEP
Lights when the recording mode is set to EP
(extended play) or SEP (super extended play).
NTSC
Lights when playing NTSC format video.
MN
Lights when the recording mode is set to MN
(manual recording level) mode.
(page 102)
Indicates which channels of a bilingual broadcast
are recorded.
6
7
Character display
R / RW
Indicates the type of recordable DVD loaded: DVD-R or
DVD-RW.
(page 101)
Lights when the component video output is set to
progressive scan.
8
PL (page 81)
Lights when a VR mode disc is loaded and the
recorder is in Play List mode.
OVER (page 103)
Lights when the analog audio input level is too high.
VPS / PDC (page 53)
Lights when receiving a VPS/PDC broadcast during a
VPS/PDC-enabled timer recording.
2 3 (page 106)
Shows the remote control mode (if nothing is
displayed, the remote control mode is 1).
V
Lights when an unfinalized Video mode disc is
loaded.
24
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Getting started
04
Chapter 4
Getting started
3
Use the ꢀ/ꢁ buttons to choose a language, then
press ENTER.
Switching on and setting up
When you switch the recorder on for the first time, you
can make several basic settings using the Setup
Navigator feature. This takes you through setting the
clock, the internal TV tuner and the video output settings.
Initial Setup
Basic
Clock Language
Input
Tuner
English
français
Video In/Out
Audio In
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
Powe
Help
Deutsch
Español
Svenska
Italiano
Nederlands
PyccK N N
Setup
If you’re using the recorder for the first time, we strongly
recommend you use the Setup Navigator before starting
to use the recorder.
4
Press ENTER to start setting up using the Setup
Navigator.
STANDBY/ON
ꢀ
Initial Setup
Basic
Clock
Complete this setup before you
Input
Tuner
start using your recorder.
Video In/Out
Audio In
Powe
Help
Start
Cancel
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
Setup
Please use the Initial Setup if you
want to make more detailed settings.
• If you don’t want to use the Setup Navigator, press ꢁ
to select Cancel, then press ENTER to exit the Setup
Navigator.
ENTER
5
Select the Auto Channel Setting (‘Auto Scan’ or
‘Download from TV’), or ‘Do not set’, then press
ENTER.
Initial Setup
Basic
Clock AutoChannel Setting
Input
1
Switch on your TV and set the video input to this
Tuner
recorder.
Video In/Out
Audio In
Powe
Help
Auto Scan
Download from TV
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
Setup Do not Set
2
Press the ꢀ STANDBY/ON button on the remote
control or the front panel to switch on.
When you switch on for the first time, your TV should
display the Setup Navigator screen. (If the Setup
Navigator doesn’t appear, you can also access it from the
Initial Setup menu; see page 100).
• Select Do not set if you want to skip setting up the
channels (because they have already been set up, for
example).
• If this recorder is connected to a compatible TV using
a fully-wired 21-pin SCART cable, the recorder will
take a few seconds to download country, TV screen
size and language information. (Check the manual
that came with your TV for compatibility information.)
• You can only use the Download from TV feature if
you connected this recorder to your TV using a
fully-wired 21-pin SCART cable connected to the
AV1(RGB)-TV connector, and if your TV supports this
function (check your TV’s instruction manual for
more details).
25
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Getting started
04
•
Use the ꢂ/ꢃ buttons to choose your country,
The recorder takes a short while to set the time. After
you see that the time has been set, select Next to
proceed.
then press ENTER.
Initial Setup
Basic
Clock Country Selection
Input
PoweCountry
Help
Initial Setup
Tuner
Basic
Clock AutoClock Setting
Input
Video In/Out
Audio In
Austria
Tuner
Date
SAT 01
11
/
:
01
20
/
2005
Video In/Out
Audio In
Powe
Time
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
Setup
Help
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
Setup
Clock Set CH
Pr
1
Start
Next
•
Auto-tuning channels
The Auto Scan option automatically scans and sets the
If the time could not be set automatically, press
RETURN to go back to the previous screen and select
Manual.
channel presets.
Tuning
32/213
Cancel
•
Manual clock setting
If no stations in your area are broadcasting time
signals, you can set the clock manually.
•
Downloading channels from your TV
Use the ꢂ/ꢃ buttons to set your time zone.
You can set this by selecting a city or a time relative
to GMT.
Use the Download from TV option to download all the
channels that your TV is tuned to.
Downloading
Pr 5
32/213
Initial Setup
1/2
Basic
Clock Manual Clock Setting
Input
Cancel
Tuner
Austria
Vienna
Time Zone
Video In/Out
Audio In
Powe
Help
6
Select ‘Auto’ for automatic time setting, or
‘Manual’ to set the clock manually, then press
ENTER.
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
Setup Summer Time
Off
Initial Setup
Press ꢁ then use the ꢂ/ꢃ buttons to select ‘On’
or ‘Off’ for summer time, then press ENTER.
Select On if you are currently using summer time.
Basic
Clock ClockSetting
Input
Tuner
Video In/Out
Audio In
Powe
Help
Auto
Manual
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
Setup
Initial Setup
1/2
Basic
Clock Manual Clock Setting
Input
Tuner
Austria
Vienna
Time Zone
Video In/Out
Audio In
Powe
Help
•
Auto clock setting
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
Setup Summer Time
On
Some TV channels broadcast time signals together
with the program. This recorder can use these
signals to set the clock automatically.
Set ‘Clock Set CH‘ to the channel preset number
that broadcasts a time signal, then move the
cursor down to ‘Start’ and press ENTER.
Set the date (day/month/year) and time, then
press ENTER to make all the settings.
Initial Setup
Initial Setup
2/2
Basic
Clock Manual Clock Setting
Input
Tuner
Basic
Clock AutoClock Setting
SAT 01
00
/
:
01
00
/
2005
Date
Video In/Out
Audio In
Powe
Help
Setup
Time Zone
Tuner
Input
Date
––
––
/
:
––
––
/
––––
Video In/Out
Audio In
Powe
Time
Time
Help
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
Austria
Vienna
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
Setup
Clock Set CH
Pr
1
Start
Summer Time
On
Use the ꢀ/ꢁ buttons to change the value in the
highlighted field.
26
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Getting started
04
Use the ꢂ/ꢃ buttons to move from one field to
• Manual channel setting – This setting lets you skip
channels where there is no station, as well as
manually tune to stations. See Manual CH Setting on
page 101.
another.
• You can go back to the previous screen at anytime in
the Setup Navigator by pressing RETURN.
• Setting up the remote to control your TV – You can set
up the supplied remote control to control many
brands of TV. See Setting up the remote to control your
TV on page 109.
7
Select the TV screen type, ‘Wide (16:9)’ or
‘Standard (4:3)’.
Initial Setup
• If for any reason you need to cancel the setup process
before it’s completed, you will be asked the next time
you switch on whether you want to start setting up
again, or whether to leave it until later.
Basic
Clock TVScreen Size
Input
Tuner
Video In/Out
Audio In
Powe
Help
Wide (16:9)
Standard (4:3)
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
Setup
Setting up the GUIDE Plus+™ system
Use the ꢀ/ꢁ buttons to select, then press ENTER.
Is your TV compatible with progressive scan
The GUIDE Plus+™ system is a free, interactive on-
screen television programming guide. The system offers
program listings for all major channels, one-touch
recording, search by genre, recommendations according
to your profile and more.
8
video?
Initial Setup
Clock Progressive
Input
Basic
Tuner
For the GUIDE Plus+ system to function correctly, it is
important that you set the language and country
correctly in the Setup Navigator, and that you have
performed a scan for available channels, as these are all
used by the GUIDE Plus+ system. If any of these things
are not yet set, please run the Setup Navigator first (see
Switching on and setting up on page 25).
Video In/Out
Audio In
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
Powe
Help
Compatible
Not Compatible
Setup Don't Know
Use the ꢀ/ꢁ buttons to select Compatible, Not
Compatible, or Don’t Know, then press ENTER.
TV listings information is received via ‘host channels’. In
order to receive the correct TV listings information for
your country or region you need to set up the GUIDE
Plus+ system and ‘download’ the TV listings information.
The initial download can take up to 24 hours, but once
this is done, all future updates are automatic.
• Note that progressive scan video is only output
through the AV1(RGB)-TV connector and the
component video outputs.
9
Press ENTER to exit the Setup Navigator, or select
‘Go Back’ if you want to start again.
Initial Setup
Basic
Clock
Tuner
Input Setupis complete!
PoweEnjoy using your DVD recorder!
Video In/Out
Audio In
Help
Finish Setup
Go Back
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
Setup
That completes basic setup using the Setup Navigator.
ENTER
Other settings you can make
After setting up using the Setup Navigator, you should be
ready to start enjoying your DVD recorder. It’s possible,
however, that you may want to make a couple of
additional settings, depending on how the recorder is set
up for terrestrial TV broadcasts.
27
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Getting started
04
1
Press GUIDE to display the GUIDE Plus+ setup
4
If you are using an external receiver (such as a
menu.
satellite receiver) with the supplied G-LINK cable,
complete this step, otherwise jump to step 5 below.
The language and country settings are already set to
whatever you selected in the Setup Navigator.
• See Connecting to a cable box, satellite receiver or
digital terrestrial receiver on page 16 for more on using
the supplied G-LINK cable.
2
Use the ꢀ/ꢁ buttons to select Postal Code.
• Select External Receiver 1, 2 or 3, then press
ENTER. (If you have just one external receiver, use
External Receiver 1. You can add further receivers in
2 and 3 if you need to.)
After pressing ENTER:
• Select your reception method (Terrestrial, Cable or
Satellite).
• Select your provider (if applicable).
• Select the brand of your external receiver.
• Identify which input your external receiver is
connected to.
After completing these steps the recorder will try and
communicate with your external receiver and change the
channel via the G-LINK cable. If the channel was
successfully changed, select Yes to confirm.
3
Use the number and cursor buttons to enter your
postal code.
If the channel did not change, select No. The GUIDE
Plus+ system will try other codes assigned to your
external receiver. If none of the codes changes the
channel successfully, tune your external receiver to the
host channel for your country (refer to step 5 below) and
leave it on overnight. The recorder needs to be in standby.
It will wake up automatically and download new codes
from the host channel. The next day, try this setup
process again:
• Press GUIDE to display the GUIDE Plus+ setup
menu.
• Press ꢀ to highlight the Menu bar, then use ꢃ to
reach the Setup area and select Setup.
The system uses your postal code to identify which TV
listings data is correct for the area in which you live, so it
is important that you enter it correctly.
• Continue setting up from the start of this step again.
If your external receiver still doesn’t respond to the
G-LINK controller, please call customer support and
report the brand and model of your external receiver.
28
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Getting started
04
See also GUIDE Plus+ FAQ and troubleshooting on
page 47.
• If you cannot receive any of the host channels (see
the above table) then you won’t be able to use the
GUIDE Plus+ system. In this case do not set the
postal code (or set Country to Other) in the GUIDE
Plus+ setup screen. (When GUIDE Plus+ service
starts in your area, set the postal code again.)
5
Identify the host channel for your country.
The TV listings information available in GUIDE Plus+ is
distributed throughout Europe by selected broadcasters
called host channels. It is important that the host
channel for your country is correctly identified in order to
receive listings information (EPG download).
• Even if you can’t use the EPG functions where you
live, you can still set ShowView timer recordings and
manual recordings — see Setting a timer recording on
page 53.
A If you are not using an external receiver, this recorder
will automatically scan all channels for the host channel:
• The front panel display shows EPG when receiving
data. If you power on the recorder during an EPG
download, the download is canceled.
• Leave the recorder in standby overnight (do not leave
it switched on).
B If you are using an external receiver, you need to
identify the host channel from the table below:
• EPG data may be received several times a day. All
updates are automatic.
Country/
Region
• When downloading EPG data, the recorder may
sound as though it is on. This is normal.
Host channels
Comments
Austria
Eurosport
Checking the downloaded data the
following day
Belgium
(Flemish)
Music Factory (TMF)
France
Germany
Italy
Canal+
Analog only
Analog only
1
Press GUIDE.
Eurosport
Sport Italia
Netherlands Music Factory (TMF), Use TMF if you live in
Eurosport
Amsterdam, Eindhoven or
Rotterdam.
Spain
Tele 5
Analog only
Switzerland Eurosport
UK ITV, Eurosport
ITV is analog only. Use
Eurosport if you are a SKY
subscriber and you no longer
have a terrestrial antenna.
• Tune your external receiver to the appropriate host
channel and leave the receiver on and the recorder in
standby overnight.
You should see a grid filled with channel logos and TV
listings information. Use the ꢀ/ꢁ buttons to review the
list. If you notice that there are channels missing, or that
there are channels in the list that you don’t get, go to the
Editor screen:
C If you use both an external receiver and this recorder
as sources, follow the instructions above for setting up
without an external receiver. Only if this is unsuccessful
try the external receiver method.
• Press ꢀ repeatedly until the Menu bar is highlighted.
• Press ꢃ until Editor is highlighted. The main area of
the screen now shows a list of channels. Those that
are turned ON are displayed in the grid; those that
are OFF are hidden. Use the ꢀ/ꢁ/ꢂ/ꢃ buttons to
move down the list and turn channels ON or OFF as
necessary.
About EPG download
• EPG data can only be received when the recorder is
in standby. (When not using the recorder, therefore,
please switch it into standby.) If you’re using an
external receiver, leave this on when EPG data is
downloading.
• For any channel that you turn ON, the GUIDE Plus+
system will need to know how it is received (the
source) and on which program number. The source
may be the built-in tuner of this recorder, or an
external receiver. The program number is the number
29
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Getting started
04
on which the channel can be found on its receiving
device/source. The entry in the Editor screen must
match this number for correct recording of that
channel.
STANDBY/ON
OPEN/CLOSE
ꢄ
ꢃ
• The above is especially important for the ‘host
channel’. Please make sure that the host channel is
always switched ON.
HDD
DVD
CH
2
Use the number buttons to change the program
numbers as you like.
PLAY
PAUSE STOP
REC
STOP REC
ì
3
When you’re done, press the BLUE Action button
(Home) to get back to the GUIDE Plus+ home screen.
• You can find detailed information on using the GUIDE
Plus+ system in the following chapter.
DVD RECORDER
Selecting the hard disk or DVD for
playback and recording
1
If they aren’t already on, switch on your TV and
this recorder.
Press ꢃ STANDBY/ON to switch on.
The HDD and DVD buttons (remote control and front
panel) are used to select the hard disk (HDD) or DVD for
playback and recording. The indicator in the front panel
display shows which is currently selected.
• Make sure that the video input on your TV is set to this
recorder.
2
Press HDD to record to the HDD, or DVD to record
to a recordable DVD.
If you choose to record to the HDD, skip to step 5 now.
3
Press ꢄ OPEN/CLOSE to open the disc tray.
HDD
DVD
4
Load a blank DVD-R or DVD-RW disc with the
label side face-up, using the disc guide to align the
disc.
• When you load a new, blank DVD-RW disc, the
recorder will take a moment to initialize it for
recording.
• Blank DVD-R discs are ready for Video mode
recording out of the box.
Making your first recording
This quick guide shows you how to make a basic
recording of a TV program on either the HDD, or to a
recordable DVD.
5
Use the CH +/– buttons to select the TV channel
you want to record from.
Recording is covered in much more detail in chapter 6
(Recording).
• You can also use the +/– buttons on the front panel if
the recorder is stopped.
• Channel presets are numbered 1–99.
30
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Getting started
04
• If the recorder is connected to your TV using a SCART
cable and your TV supports Direct Recording, it’s
possible to quickly start recording whatever channel
your TV is tuned to. See Direct recording from TV on
page 52 for detailed instructions.
Changing audio channels
You can change the audio channel of the broadcast or
external input signal.
AUDIO
6
7
Press ì REC to start recording.
• By default, the recording will be in SP (standard play)
mode, which will give you around two hours of
recording from a blank DVD disc. The different
recording modes and their recommended uses are
covered in more detail in the chapter on Recording.
•
Press AUDIO to change the audio.
The current audio channel is displayed on-screen.
• If the NICAM audio setting (see Nicam Select on
page 102) is set to NICAM and you are watching a
NICAM broadcast, you can switch between NICAM
and Regular (non-NICAM) audio.
• You can pause recording by pressing ꢋ PAUSE.
Press ì REC or ꢋ PAUSE again to restart recording.
When you want to stop recording, press
ꢀ STOP REC.
NICAM
Regular
Playing back your recording
The TV program you just recorded should be on the HDD
or DVD disc as a single title with one or more chapters.
• If the NICAM broadcast is bilingual, you can also
select the language.
•
Press ꢆ PLAY to start playback.
NICAM A
Regular
NICAM B
If you want to stop playback before the end of the
recording, press ꢅ STOP.
NICAM A+B
• You can also select the language for a non-NICAM
bilingual broadcast.
Using the built-in TV tuner
A (L)
B (R)
A + B (L+R)
Changing TV channels
There are three different ways to select TV channels. Note
that you can’t change the TV channel during playback,
recording or during recording standby.
• When watching a recording made from an external
input with Bilingual recording selected (see External
Audio on page 102), you can switch the audio
channel between left (L), right (R) or both (L+R).
L
R
CH
L+R
Note
• When recording to the HDD with HDD Recording
Format set to Video Mode On, to DVD in Video mode,
or on the LPCM setting, only one channel of a
bilingual broadcast is recorded. In this case, decide
which language you want to record before recording
by setting the Bilingual Recording setting (see
Bilingual Recording on page 102).
ENTER
• CH +/– buttons on the remote
• Number buttons on the remote – For example, to
select channel 4, press 4 then ENTER; for channel 34,
1
press 3, 4, ENTER.
• +/– buttons on the front panel
Note
1. Channel presets are numbered 1–99.
31
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Getting started
04
Switching between TV and DVD
Important
When the recorder is stopped or recording you can
choose whether to have the audio/video from the built-in
TV tuner (or external input) play on your TV (‘DVD mode’),
or watch the channel that the TV is currently set to (‘TV
mode’).
• Throughout this manual, the term ‘DVD’ means
playback-only DVD-Video discs and DVD-R/RW. If a
function is specific to a particular kind of DVD disc, it
is specified.
• Some DVD-Video discs don’t allow certain playback
controls to operate at certain points in the disc. This
is not a malfunction.
During playback or when a menu is being displayed on-
screen, the sound and video is always routed to your TV
and is unaffected by the TV/DVD mode setting.
Note that the recorder must be connected to your TV
using a SCART cable to be able to use this feature.
1
Press ꢃ STANDBY/ON to switch on.
Also turn on your TV and make sure that it is set to the
correct video input.
2
Press HDD to playback from the HDD, or DVD to
TV/DVD
play a DVD.
If playing video from the HDD, skip to step 5 below.
3
Press ꢄ OPEN/CLOSE to open the disc tray.
•
Press TV/DVD to switch between TV mode and
4
Load a disc.
DVD mode.
Load a disc with the label side facing up, using the disc
tray guide to align the disc (if you’re loading a double-
sided DVD-Video disc, load it with the side you want to
play face down).
Basic playback
• If you want to play a DTS audio CD, please first read
the note on page 34.
This section shows you how to use your recorder for
playback of discs (DVD, CD, etc.), and for playback of
video from the HDD. More playback features, such as
repeat and program play, are covered in Playback on
page 61.
5
Press ꢆ PLAY to start playback.
• If you’re playing a DVD-Video or Video CD, a disc
menu may appear when you start playback. Use the
ꢀ/ꢁ/ꢂ/ꢃbuttons and ENTER to navigate DVD disc
menus, and the number buttons and ENTER for
Video CD menus.
STANDBY/ON
OPEN/CLOSE
• When playing video from the HDD, playback will
automatically stop after the end of a title is reached.
ꢄ
ꢃ
HDD
DVD
• See the following sections for more details on playing
specific kinds of discs.
6
7
To stop playback, press ꢅ STOP.
CH
When you’ve finished using the recorder, eject
the disc and switch the recorder back into standby.
• To open/close the disc tray, press ꢄ OPEN/CLOSE.
Remove the disc before putting the recorder into
standby.
• Press ꢃ STANDBY/ON to switch the recorder into
ENTER
standby.
PLAY
STOP
32
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Getting started
04
Playing DVD discs
The table below shows the basic playback controls for
DVD-Video, and recordable DVD discs.
Playing from the HDD
The table below shows the basic playback controls when
playing video recorded on the hard disk (HDD).
PLAY
PLAY
Press to start playback.
Press to start playback.
If RESUME is displayed on-screen, play-
back starts from the place last stopped.
If RESUME is displayed on-screen, play-
back starts from the place last stopped.
Playback automatically stops after the end
of a title is reached.
STOP
Press to stop playback.
You can resume playback from the same
point by pressing ꢆ PLAY. (Press ꢅ STOP
again to cancel the resume function.)
STOP
Press to stop playback.
You can resume playback from the same
point by pressing ꢆ PLAY. (Press ꢅ STOP
again to cancel the resume function.)
PAUSE
Pauses playback, or restarts playback
when paused.
PAUSE
Pauses playback, or restarts playback
REV SCAN FWD SCAN
Press to start scanning. Press repeatedly
to increase the scanning speed.
when paused.
REV SCAN FWD SCAN
Press to start scanning. Press repeatedly
PREV
NEXT
Press to skip to previous/next chapter/title.
(During playback you can also use the
front panel +/– buttons.)
to increase the scanning speed.
PREV
NEXT
Press to skip to previous/next chapter/title.
(During playback you can also use the
front panel +/– buttons.)
Except VR mode: During playback, enter a
chapter number then press ENTER to skip
directly to that chapter within the currently
playing title.
On some discs, you can also use the num-
ber buttons to select numbered items in
the disc menu.
During playback, enter a title number then
press ENTER to skip directly to that title.
Press CLEAR to clear a number entry and
start again.
CLEAR
CLEAR
CLEAR
ENTER
CLEAR
VR mode only: During playback, enter a
title number then press ENTER.
All: Press CLEAR to clear a number entry
and start again.
ENTER
BACK CM SKIP
(Commercial back/skip) Each press skips
backward/forward progressively up to a
maximum of ten minutes forward or three
minutes back.
BACK CM SKIP
(Commercial back/skip) Each press skips
backward/forward progressively up to a
maximum of ten minutes forward or three
minutes back.
STEP/SLOW
During playback, press to start slow-
motion playback. Press repeatedly to
change the playback speed.
While paused, press to advance a single
frame in either direction.
ꢈ
ꢇ
STEP/SLOW
During playback, press to start slow-
motion playback. Press repeatedly to
change the playback speed.
While paused, press to advance a single
frame in either direction.
ꢈ
ꢇ
Press to display the menu of a DVD-Video
disc.
TOP MENU
MENU
Use the cursor buttons to navigate DVD-
Video disc menus; press ENTER to select
items.
ENTER
RETURN
Press to return to the previous level of a
DVD-Video disc menu.
33
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Getting started
04
Playing CDs and WMA/MP3 discs
Playing Video CD/Super VCDs
The table below shows the basic playback controls for
Video CD/Super VCDs.
The table below shows the basic playback controls for
1
audio CDs , and WMA/MP3 files.
Some discs feature Playback Control (PBC for short)
menus. These discs show PBC in the display when you
load them and display a menu on-screen from where you
PLAY
Press to start playback.
2
can select what to watch.
STOP
Press to stop playback.
PLAY
Press to start playback.
Video CD only: If RESUME is displayed on-
screen, playback starts from the place last
stopped.
PAUSE
Pauses playback, or restarts playback
when paused.
REV SCAN FWD SCAN
Press to start scanning. Press again to
STOP
Press to stop playback.
increase the scanning speed. (There are
two scan speeds; the current scan speed
is shown on-screen.)
Video CD only: You can resume playback
from the same point by pressing ꢆ PLAY.
(Press ꢅ STOP again to cancel the resume
function.)
PREV
NEXT
Press to skip to previous/next track (or
folder for WMA/MP3 disc). (During play-
back you can also use the front panel +/–
buttons.)
PAUSE
Pauses playback, or restarts playback
when paused.
REV SCAN FWD SCAN
Press to start scanning. Press repeatedly
During playback, enter a track number
then press ENTER to skip directly to that
track.
Press CLEAR to clear a number entry and
start again.
to increase the scanning speed.
PREV
NEXT
Press to skip to previous/next track.
When a PBC menu is displayed, press to
display the previous/next page. (During
playback you can also use the front panel
+/– buttons.)
CLEAR
CLEAR
ENTER
During playback, enter a track number
then press ENTER to skip directly to that
track.
Press CLEAR to clear a number entry and
start again.
CLEAR
CLEAR
While a PBC menu screen is displayed,
use to select numbered menu items.
ENTER
BACK CM SKIP
Video CD only: Each press skips backward/
forward progressively up to a maximum of
ten minutes forward or three minutes
back. Note that this function doesn’t work
when playing in PBC mode.
STEP/SLOW
During playback, press to start slow-
motion playback. Press repeatedly to
change the playback speed (forward only).
While paused, press to advance a single
frame (forward only).
ꢈ
ꢇ
RETURN
Press to display the disc menu of a Video
CD/Super VCD playing in PBC mode.
Note
1. If you want to play a DTS audio CD, make sure the recorder is connected to a DTS-compatible amp/receiver with a digital connection. Noise
will be output through the analog outputs. Also make sure that STEREO is selected using the AUDIO button (see Switching audio channels
on page 69).
2. When playing in PBC mode, some playback features, such as search, repeat and program play are not available. You can play a PBC Video
CD/Super VCD in non-PBC mode by pressing ꢍ to start playback instead of ꢆ PLAY.
34
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Getting started
04
Using the Home Menu
Displaying disc information on-
screen
From the Home Menu screen you can access all the
features of the recorder.
You can display various on-screen information about the
disc loaded or the HDD.
Note that some options in the Home Menu may be
grayed out sometimes, indicating that they are not
available at the present time. For example, the
Photoviewer option is grayed out unless there is a disc
loaded that contains JPEG image files.
Press HOME MENU to display the Home Menu screen:
HDD
DVD
Disc Navigator
GUIDE Plus+
Easy Timer
Disc Setup
Initial Setup
Video/Audio Adjust
Copy
Play Mode
Photo Viewer
Jukebox
Use the ꢀ/ꢁ/ꢂ/ꢃ buttons followed by ENTER to select
the option you want. To exit the Home Menu, press
HOME MENU.
DISPLAY
1
Press DISPLAY repeatedly to display/change the
ENTER
on-screen information.
HOME
MENU
• Press once to show the HDD and removable disc
(DVD, etc.) activity together. Press again to show the
status of just the currently selected playback/
recording device (HDD or removable disc).
• The on-screen display automatically disappears after
150 minutes.
Home menu options
2
To hide the information display, press DISPLAY
repeatedly until it disappears.
The example displays below are a guide only; actual
displays vary according to the disc loaded, etc.
Disc Navigator (page 62, Disc Setup (page 95)
page 81)
GUIDE Plus+ (page 38)
Initial Setup (page 100)
HDD and removable disc activity display
Press DISPLAY once to see the HDD and removable disc
(DVD, etc.) activity. Use the HDD and DVD buttons to
switch between the two kinds of display.
Easy Timer (page 54)
Video/Audio Adjust
(page 97)
Play Mode (page 65)
Copy (page 71)
Photo Viewer (page 93)
Jukebox (page 90)
35
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Getting started
04
The example displays below show high-speed copying
from HDD to DVD, and HDD chase playback.
7
Audio mode
Shows the broadcast audio mode for the current channel
preset (Mono, Stereo, etc.).
Rec Mode SP(2h00m/DVD)
8
Copy control information
HDD
DVD-RW Video
Shows recording restrictions of the current channel
Remain 10h35m
Stop
Hi-Speed Copy
0h08m left
Remain –h––m
Stop
program.
9
Disc name
Shows the disc name.
(For CDs, this area shows playable files other than CD
audio tracks; for example, Multi-format: WMA/MP3.)
Rec Mode SP(2h00m/DVD)
10 Finalized
HDD
DVD-RW Video
Shows Finalized if a recordable DVD is finalized.
Remain 10h35m
Chase Play
Rec
Remain 0h52m
Stop
11 TV/DVD mode
Shows the current mode of the recorder (see Switching
between TV and DVD on page 32).
Recording time
Stop display 2
Relative playback position
1
2
Stop display 1
ꢅStop
DVD-RW VR
Original
ABC Pr 1
Stereo
Copy Once
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
14:52 MON 15/11/2004
ꢅStop
DVD-RW VR
Original
ABC Pr 1
Stereo
Copy Once
Titles
Lock Disc
: Original 99
: On
Play List 15
Resume
XP (1h00m/DVD)
Finalized
Rem. 0h35m
TV Mode
Disc Name
: Comedy shows
1
2
Date and time
Number of titles/tracks on disc
DVD Mode
9 10
11
For a VR mode DVD-RW, the number of Original and Play
List titles are shown separately.
1
DVD-RW Original / Play List
If a VR mode disc is loaded, this shows whether playback
is currently set to Original or Play List.
Play display 1
During preview playback of the Copy List, this shows
Copy List.
1
2
3
4
5
2
Disc type and mode
ꢆPlay
DVD-R Video Chapters 15
Title Total 0. 11. 52
3–2
0. 00. 15
Shows the disc type (HDD, DVD-R, DVD-RW, CD, etc.),
and the disc mode for recordable DVD, if applicable (VR
or Video).
DVD Mode
3
Recording mode and time
Shows the current recording mode (XP, SP, LP, etc.), and
1
2
Number of chapters in title
the total recording time of the disc.
Current title and chapter number
4
Resume
(For CD/Video CD/Super VCD, shows current track; for
WMA/MP3, shows current folder and track; for JPEG
disc, shows current folder and file.)
Shows Resume if playback can be resumed from the last
place stopped.
5
Recording time remaining
3
Elapsed title time
Shows the approximate recording time left on the disc in
the current recording mode.
(For CD, WMA, MP3, Super VCD, shows elapsed track
time; for Video CD, shows elapsed disc time.)
6
Preset name and number
Shows the preset name and preset number for the
currently selected channel.
36
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Getting started
04
4
5
Total running time of title
Angle indicator
Tip
• When using the simultaneous play and record
feature, the display shows information for playback
only.
Lights during multi-angle scenes.
Play display 2
• During real-time copy, the copy source playback
information is displayed.
1
2
3
4
5
• The Video mode disc displays become the same as a
DVD-Video disc once the disc is finalized.
ꢆPlay
3–2
0. 00. 15
!
DVD-R Video Chapter Time 0. 00. 21
Chapter Total 0. 01. 52
ꢋꢋꢋꢋꢋꢋꢋ
Hi-Speed Copy
Title Name
• The total recording time figure shown in parenthesis
is calculated based on a 12cm/4.7GB disc at the
displayed record setting.
4.32Mbps
: 21/11 Football match
• Recording and playback times for TV recordings are
approximately 0.1% shorter than the actual time. This
is because of the slightly different frame rates of TV
broadcasts versus DVD.
1
Chase playback, simultaneous record/playback,
copy, disc back-up
Indicates that recording, copying or back-up is in
progress.
• The frame number is shown next to the elapsed time
display when the disc is paused.
2
3
4
Elapsed chapter time
Total running time of chapter
Data transfer rate
• Copy Once or Can’t Record messages may appear
in the stop or recording displays. These indicate that
the broadcast TV program contains copy control
information.
1
Shows the current data rate being read from the disc.
5
Copy protected material (!)
Shows ‘!’ if the playback material is copy-once protected.
Recording display
1
2
3
4
ìRec
DVD-R Video
3
0. 00. 15
22:00
ABC Pr 1
Stereo
21:00
–
XP (1h00m/DVD)
Rem.
0h35m
Copy Once
DVD Mode
5
1
2
3
Current title number
Elapsed recording time
Timer recording start and stop times
Shows the start and stop times if the current recording is
a timer recording.
4
Remaining recording time available
Shows the amount of space left on the disc in the current
recording mode.
5
Recording mode
Shows the current recording mode (XP, SP, LP, etc.), and
the total recording time of the disc.
Note
1.Data transfer rate shows the amount of video and audio information recorded on the disc. It is not an indication of picture/audio quality.
37
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the GUIDE Plus+™ electronic program guide
05
Chapter 5
Using the GUIDE Plus+™ electronic
program guide
The GUIDE Plus+ system
The GUIDE Plus+ system* is a free, interactive on-
screen television programming guide. The system offers
program listings for all major channels, one-touch
recording, search by genre, recommendations according
to your profile and more. The GUIDE Plus+ system is a
convenient way to find out what's on right now or during
the coming week, by channel or by genre. The GUIDE
Plus+ system also allows you to automatically set your
viewing and recording selections quickly and easily.
Using the GUIDE Plus+ system
™
All the various features and areas are color-coded for
ease of navigation. All screens (with the exception of
some setup screens) have the following common
elements:
1
Action bar
Information
Video
box
window
Menu bar
In order to receive the correct TV listings information for
your country or region you need to set up the GUIDE
Plus+ system and ‘download’ the TV listings information.
If you haven’t already done this, please turn to Setting up
the GUIDE Plus+™ system on page 27 before
proceeding.
Grid
Information
Panel
• Grid – Displays TV listings information for the next
seven days by channel and time.
* GUIDE Plus+, ShowView, VIDEO Plus+, G-LINK are (1)
registered trademarks or trademarks of, (2) manufactured
under license from and (3) subject of various international
patents and patent applications owned by, or licensed to,
Gemstar-TV Guide International, Inc. and/or its related
affiliates.
• Menu bar – Gives access to the various areas of the
GUIDE Plus+ system.
• Information box – Shows short program
descriptions or help menus.
• Action bar – Color-coded Action buttons change
function depending on the area.
Legal Notice
GEMSTAR-TV GUIDE INTERNATIONAL, INC. AND/OR ITS
RELATED AFFILIATES ARE NOT IN ANY WAY LIABLE FOR THE
ACCURACY OF THE PROGRAM SCHEDULE INFORMATION
PROVIDED BY THE GUIDE PLUS+ SYSTEM. IN NO EVENT SHALL
GEMSTAR-TV GUIDE INTERNATIONAL, INC. AND/OR ITS
RELATED AFFILIATES BE LIABLE FOR ANY AMOUNTS
REPRESENTING LOSS OF PROFITS, LOSS OF BUSINESS, OR
INDIRECT, SPECIAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES IN
CONNECTION WITH THE PROVISION OR USE OF ANY
INFORMATION, EQUIPMENT, OR SERVICES RELATING TO THE
GUIDE PLUS+ SYSTEM.
• Video window – Allows you to continue watching
the current program while using the GUIDE Plus+
system.
• Information panels – Display program promotions
or instructions on the GUIDE Plus+ system.
Note
1 The GUIDE Plus+ system can’t be used when the Input Line System is set to 525 System (see also Input Line System on page 100).
38
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the GUIDE Plus+™ electronic program guide
05
Navigating GUIDE Plus+
Key
What it does
The table below shows a summary of the remote buttons
you’ll use to navigate the GUIDE Plus+ system.
ENTER
Press to confirm a selection or to leave
the GUIDE Plus+ screen.
Number buttons Use for numeric entry.
ꢌ / ꢍ
Press to select the previous/next page
of information (in the grid, for
example).
ꢈ / ꢇ
Press to select the previous/next day.
One-Button-Record
The RED Action button (Record) is visible anytime you
can highlight a program title, including from the Grid,
after a search, or in your recommendations in the My TV
area.
MENU
The program name, date, channel, recording start and
end times are all set automatically when you set a timer
recording using One-Button-Record. You can edit the
settings if you want to anytime before the recording is
due to start (see Editing a scheduled recording on
page 43).
ENTER
GUIDE
INFO
1
Use the ꢀ/ꢁ/ꢂ/ꢃ buttons to highlight a
program title.
PREV
NEXT
STEP/SLOW
ꢈ
ꢇ
TIMER REC
DVD RECORDER
Key
What it does
Press to access GUIDE Plus+ (also
use to exit GUIDE Plus+).
GUIDE
2
Press the RED Action button (Record).
The program is now set for recording. When the program
ꢀ/ꢁ/ꢂ/ꢃ
Use to navigate screens (highlight an
item).
is due to start, the recorder will switch to the correct
1
channel and start recording .
RED, GREEN,
YELLOW, BLUE
Action buttons that change
functionality depending on the Area.
• You can review the shows you have set to record in
the Schedule Area (see also The Schedule Area on
page 43).
MENU
Press to jump directly to the Menu bar.
TIMER REC
Press to go directly to the Schedule
area.
Press to display extended information
for the current program.
INFO
Note
1 Please note that recording times set using the GUIDE Plus+ system do not automatically change to reflect any changes that may occur in
the program broadcast schedules.
39
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the GUIDE Plus+™ electronic program guide
05
Lock / Unlock video window
When you enter the GUIDE Plus+ system, the channel
you were watching remains visible in the video window.
The date stamp above the window lets you know the
channel, date and time.
Areas
The GUIDE Plus+™ system consists of seven Areas. All
Areas can be accessed from the Menu bar.
• Grid – The GUIDE Plus+ system Home Area.
Displays TV listings information for the next seven
days by time and channel.
The default setting for this window is ‘locked’, as
indicated by a closed padlock icon above the video
window. When locked, the video window always shows
the channel you were previously watching as you move
up and down through the listings grid.
• Search – Search for TV programs by category (eg.,
Sport), subcategory (eg., Football) or keyword.
• My TV – Set up a profile and receive
recommendations according to your preferences.
If you prefer, you can unlock the video window so that as
you highlight different channels in the listings grid, the
current program showing on that channel is shown in
the video window.
• Schedule – Shows all scheduled recordings.
• Info – Area for additional information, such as
weather (not available in all regions).
1
Use the ꢀ/ꢁ/ꢂ/ꢃ buttons to highlight a
• Editor – Change channel settings.
channel logo.
• Setup – Setup the GUIDE Plus+™ system.
The Grid Area
The Grid screen is the main TV listings screen of GUIDE
Plus+ and is the first screen that you see when you press
GUIDE. You can see TV listings for the next seven days,
starting with the current day.
When you highlight a program in the Grid, you can see
information about it in the Information Box, including
title, synopsis, channel, source, time and length. If there
is an i symbol in the Information Box, it means that there
is an extended synopsis available. Press the INFO button
to see it.
In some countries, you can also see a rating for a
particular program (mostly movies). These ratings are
provided by local partners, such as TV magazines.
Channel logos are displayed to the left of program titles.
2
Press the RED Action button (Unlock).
The padlock icon above the video window becomes
unlocked. It remains unlocked for the remainder of your
current TV viewing session.
From the Grid Area you can:
• View and scroll through program listings
• Read program synopsis
If you want to lock the video window again, follow the
same procedure. The RED Action button will now act as
Lock.
1
• Tune to a program that’s currently showing
• Set a program to record
• Lock or unlock the video window.
• Access Information panels.
Channel mosaic screen
You can switch the display style of channels in Grid Area,
Schedule Area or My TV Area from a list to a mosaic of
channel icons by pressing the YELLOW Action button.
Select the channel icon you want using the cursor
buttons, then press ENTER to return to the previous
screen on that channel.
Note
1 If you’re using an external tuner (satellite tuner, for example), there will be a short delay of a couple of seconds before it tunes to the channel
after selecting it. This is normal.
40
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the GUIDE Plus+™ electronic program guide
05
3
Press ENTER to start the search.
Browsing the Grid
Use the following remote buttons to browse the grid:
The search results are shown sorted by time and date.
• If no search results are displayed, it means there are
no programs for the current day that match your
search criteria.
ꢀ/ꢁ/ꢂ/ꢃ (cursor buttons) – Navigate the Grid
ꢉ/ꢊ – Previous / next page
ꢈ/ꢇ – Previous / next day
BLUE Action button – Return to the current time/date in
the Grid.
Using My Choice keywords for a search
In addition to the standard categories, GUIDE Plus+ lets
you set your own keywords.
ENTER – Press on the current selection to exit GUIDE
Plus+ and start watching the program
1
Press ꢂ (cursor left) to access My Choice.
The Search Area
From the Search Area you can:
• Search by category
• Search by subcategory
• Search by keyword
• Read program synopsis
• Tune to a program that’s currently showing
• Set a program to record
• Access Information panels.
Searching
You can search for programs by category, subcategory or
by keyword (My Choice). Categories for searching
include Movies (purple), Sport (green), Children (blue)
and Others (teal). In some countries there is a further
subcatgory available called ‘Tip of the Day’. These are
programs recommended by a local partner, such as a TV
magazine.
2
Press the YELLOW Action button to add a
keyword.
3
Enter a keyword to appear in the menu.
1
Select ‘Search’ from the Menu bar.
2
Use the ꢀ/ꢁ/ꢂ/ꢃ buttons to select a category
and a subcategory.
Use the ꢀ/ꢁ/ꢂ/ꢃ buttons followed by ENTER to select
characters from the on-screen keyboard. When you’re
finished, press the GREEN Action button to exit and
continue.
4
Press ENTER to start a keyword search.
• You can delete or edit keywords using the RED and
GREEN Action buttons.
• If you choose All as the subcategory, all programs in
the category you selected will show up in the search
results.
• When you have set more than two keywords, an All
subcategory automatically appears which allows you
to search for all your keywords.
41
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the GUIDE Plus+™ electronic program guide
05
Select a channel from the mosaic of channel icons and
press ENTER. Repeat this step to add up to 16 channels.
My TV Area
The My TV Area allows you to set up a personal profile.
You can define a profile by channels, themes and/or
keywords. As soon as a personal profile has been set,
GUIDE Plus+ continuously scans the TV listings for the
next seven days. Whenever you access the My TV Area, a
list of programs matching your profile appears.
4
To add a theme to your profile, highlight
‘Themes’ and press the YELLOW Action button.
From the My TV Area you can:
• Set up a profile by channel, theme and/or keyword.
• Edit and delete profiles.
• Read program synopsis
• Tune to a program that’s currently showing
• Set a program to record
• Access Information panels.
Setting up a profile
You can set up a profile with any combination of up to 16
channels, four categories and 16 keywords.
Select a theme from the Search Area categories and
press ENTER. Repeat this step to add up to four
categories.
1
2
Select ‘My TV’ from the Menu bar.
Press the YELLOW Action button to set a profile.
5
To add a keyword to your profile, highlight
‘Keywords’ and press the YELLOW Action button.
Channels is now highlighted.
To add a channel to your profile, press the
Use the ꢀ/ꢁ/ꢂ/ꢃ buttons followed by ENTER to select
characters from the on-screen keyboard. When you’re
finished, press the GREEN Action button to exit and
continue.
3
YELLOW Action button.
6
Press ENTER to activate your profile.
• You can add up to 16 keywords by repeating step 5.
• You can edit or delete your profile using the RED and
GREEN Action buttons.
42
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the GUIDE Plus+™ electronic program guide
05
Press the GREEN Action button to go to continue, or the
RED Action button to go back.
The Schedule Area
The Schedule Area is where you can set, see, edit and
delete scheduled (timer) recordings. (See also Setting a
timer recording on page 53 for further timer recording
features.)
4
Enter a name for the scheduled recording.
From the Schedule Area you can:
• Edit or delete a One-Button-Recording.
• Set, edit or delete a ShowView recording.
• Set, edit or delete a manual recording.
Editing a scheduled recording
You can edit any parameter in a scheduled recording, or
delete it if you no longer require it.
1
Highlight the left tile of a scheduled recording.
Use the ꢀ/ꢁ/ꢂ/ꢃ buttons followed by ENTER to select
characters from the on-screen keyboard.
After entering the whole name, press the GREEN Action
button to continue.
5
Highlight the right recording tile.
6
Press the RED Action button (Quality) to change
the recording quality.
• If you only want to edit the recording quality,
frequency, destination, timing or genre settings, skip
to step 6 below.
2
3
Press the GREEN Action button (Edit).
Use the cursor and number buttons to edit the
recording date, start time, end time and channel.
1
Select from AUTO , XP, SP, LP, EP, SLP, SEP or MN (if
manual recording is set to On.)
Use the ꢀ/ꢁ (cursor up/down) buttons or the number
buttons to edit.
Note
1 This mode maximizes the recording quality to fit on to a single DVD disc. Can also be used when recording to HDD.
43
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the GUIDE Plus+™ electronic program guide
05
7
Press the GREEN Action button (Frequency) to
9
Press ꢃ (cursor right) to access the extended
change the recording frequency.
recording options:
Select from the various options for one-time, daily and
weekly recordings.
• If you want to record to a particular HDD genre, use
the YELLOW Action button (Genre) to select one.
• Use the GREEN Action button (Timing) to add extra
8
Press YELLOW Action button (Destination) to
time to the end of the recording (+0, +10, +20, +30 or
select the recording destination.
2
VPS/PDC (V–P)).
• Press ꢂ (cursor left) to display the standard
recording options again.
Deleting a scheduled recording
1
Highlight the left tile of a scheduled recording.
Select from DVD, HDD or HDDr (Auto Replace
1
Recording) .
• Auto Replace Recording is only available as an
option with regular daily or weekly recordings.
2
Press the RED Action button (Delete).
The scheduled event is deleted.
Note
1 • For a DVD timer recording, if Optimized Rec (see Optimized Rec on page 104) is set to On (and VPS/PDC is off), the recorder will adjust the
recording quality to try and fit the recording on the disc. If the recording will not fit onto the disc even on MN1 recording quality then the Re-
covery Recording feature will automatically make the recording to the HDD instead.
• If there is very little free space left on the HDD, an Auto Replace Recording may not complete successfully.
• If the HDD is being used for playback or high-speed copying when an Auto Replace Recording is due to start, the new timer recording will
not replace the old one. However, the next time the timer recording starts, both of the older two programs will be erased.
2 • If you set the timer recording to use VPS/PDC, you must switch the recorder into standby before the timer recording is due to start for it to
work correctly. For non-VPS/PDC timer recordings there is no need to switch the recorder into standby.
• Optimized Recording will not work if VPS/PDC is on.
• Up to 8 timer recordings can be set with VPS/PDC.
• VPS/PDC cannot be set for recordings made from an external input, or when the recording mode is set to AUTO.
44
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the GUIDE Plus+™ electronic program guide
05
Setting a ShowView™* recording
Setting a manual recording
1
Select ‘Schedule’ from the Menu bar.
1
Select ‘Schedule’ from the Menu bar.
2
3
Press the RED Action button (ShowView).
2
3
Press the GREEN Action button (Manual).
Use the number buttons to enter a ShowView
Use the number and ꢀ/ꢁ/ꢂ/ꢃ buttons to enter
programming number.
the recording date, then press the GREEN Action
button (Next).
• If you live in an area not yet covered by GUIDE Plus+
you may also have to input a channel number. Follow
the on-screen display to do this.
4
In the same way, enter the recording start time,
followed by the GREEN Action button (Next) to
confirm.
4
Press ENTER to confirm.
5
Enter the recording end time in the same way,
®
followed by the GREEN Action button (Next) to
confirm.
*
is a trademark of Gemstar Development
Corporation.
The ShowView system is manufactured under license from
Gemstar Development Corporation.
45
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the GUIDE Plus+™ electronic program guide
05
6
Use the number buttons to enter a channel
Switching a channel on/off
number, then press the GREEN Action button (Next)
to confirm.
You can choose whether or not to display a channel in the
Grid Area by switching the channel on or off in the Editor
Area.
1
Select ‘Editor’ from the Menu bar.
Alternatively, you can press the YELLOW Action button
(Mosaic) and use the ꢀ/ꢁ/ꢂ/ꢃ buttons to select a
channel from the mosaic, followed by ENTER.
2
Highlight the left channel tile of the channel you
want to switch on or off.
The Info Area
3
Press the RED Action button to switch the
This area is reserved for additional information such as
news, weather reports, stock quotes, and so on, and
varies by region. (Note that this feature is not available in
all countries/regions.)
channel on or off.
Changing the source and program number
1
Select ‘Editor’ from the Menu bar.
The Editor Area
The Editor Area is the central location for you to manage
your channels. Any changes you make here will affect
what is displayed in the Grid Area. The Editor Area is
mainly used when setting up the GUIDE Plus+ system to
make any manual changes as necessary.
You can also use the Editor Area if new channels become
available in your area, or if you change from cable to
satellite, say, or move house.
From the Editor Area you can:
• Display/hide channels in the grid (switch the channel
on/off).
• Select a channel source (Tuner, Ext. Rec 1, Ext. Rec.
2, etc.).
2
Highlight the right channel tile of the channel
• Enter a channel program number.
you want to make a change to.
3
Press the RED Action button to change the
channel source, or the GREEN Action button to enter
a program number.
Each press of the RED Action button changes the
channel source (Tuner, Ext. Rec 1, etc.). To set a
program number, use the number buttons to enter a
program number then press ENTER. (When set to Tuner,
make sure that the program number matches the preset
number of this recorder for what you want to record).
46
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the GUIDE Plus+™ electronic program guide
05
The Setup Area
The Setup Area is where you can set up the GUIDE Plus+
system for your particular region, TV reception
conditions, and so on.
GUIDE Plus+ FAQ and
troubleshooting
This FAQ covers only a few questions. For a complete list
please consult the GUIDE Plus+ website at:
www.europe.guideplus.com
Making changes to your GUIDE Plus+ setup
1
Select ‘Setup’ from the Menu bar.
FAQ
• When I tried setting up my external receiver I could not
get any of the attempts to work, what should I do?
A: There could be several reasons why your external
receiver could not be controlled.
– The connections could be wrong. Make sure that
the G-LINK cable is connected to the G-LINK
connector on the recorder and the IR blaster is in
front of the external receiver, pointing towards the IR
receiver of your external receiver. See Connecting to a
cable box, satellite receiver or digital terrestrial receiver
on page 16.
– The code that is listed under your brand could be
wrong. Please try other codes for your brand under
satellite, cable or terrestrial. Go to the Setup Area and
choose one of the three options (cable, satellite or
terrestrial) that you have not already tried. Follow the
on-screen prompts to make sure that GUIDE Plus+
can change channels on your external receiver. If it
does not work, repeat the process, choosing different
reception and external receiver combinations until
you have tried all the codes for your brand of receiver
that are already in the GUIDE Plus+ system. If it still
does not work, see below on how to receive new
codes overnight.
2
Highlight the part you want to change.
– The unit has not yet received new codes. The nightly
data downloads frequently include new codes for
controlling external receivers. Please tune your
external receiver to your local host channel and leave
it on overnight. Switch this recorder into standby. The
next morning, please perform the GUIDE Plus+
setup again to see if your external receiver can now
be controlled.
1
You can change the Language, Country, Postal Code
and the External Receiver settings.
3
Press ENTER to confirm.
– The external receiver that you use is currently not
supported. If, after leaving your external receiver on
overnight, and doing the Reception and External
Receiver Setup again, it still does not respond, please
call Customer Support to report your brand and
model.
Note
1 Making changes to the Country or Postal Code settings may require a new download of TV listings information. This can take up to 24 hours.
47
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the GUIDE Plus+™ electronic program guide
05
• My external receiver was successfully setup. However
I have found that when the GUIDE Plus+ system has
to change to a channel with a 3-digit program number
in the external receiver's preset, it does not work. It
looks like the GUIDE Plus+ system can only send two
digits.
– For external receiver users only: The connections
and setup are OK, but the external receiver was not
tuned to the correct host channel. Check the list of
host channels (see step 5 of Setting up the GUIDE
Plus+™ system on page 27) and leave the recorder
in standby and the external receiver on overnight
tuned to the correct host channel.
With the number of channels increasing, the number
of digits has increased as well. While older boxes use
only 2 digits, newer boxes require up to 4. It is
possible that you selected an older code for your
brand during set-up. Please access the Setup Area,
select External Receiver and repeat the setup for your
brand. (Note: Every time you see the on-screen
question about whether the receiver has changed to
a certain channel, GUIDE Plus+ has sent a different
code). Try all the different codes until your GUIDE
Plus+ system can control your external receiver
correctly. If you have no success, try to receive new
codes overnight.
– You live in a country/region where the GUIDE Plus+
system is not yet available. Check the list of countries
to see if you are in a region that is supported.
• I used the One-Button-Record feature (red Action
button) to set a recording, but I recorded the wrong
channel.
If the channel to be recorded is received via the
external receiver first make sure that the external
receiver was left switched on. Next, in the Editor
Area, make sure that the channel to be recorded is
correctly set: Access the Editor Area. Check the
source and program number of the channel that you
wanted to record. Change the source and preset
numbers if incorrect.
• I used to receive data through my terrestrial antenna or
analog cable without a set-top box. Now, I have
“upgraded” to a satellite system or to digital cable with
external receiver. What should I do to receive data for
the GUIDE Plus+ system?
If you are recording from the recorder’s internal tuner
(the Tuner setting), make sure that the program
number is the same as the preset number set on this
recorder. If they are different, go to the Editor Area
and change the program number to match the
recorder’s preset number.
You can try to receive your host channel through your
new reception method. If you have problems to
receive data we recommend that you keep your
analog terrestrial or cable connection only to receive
data this way. It is important that you identify your
host channel correctly in the Editor Area.
• The TV listings information doesn’t update.
The latest TV listings information is automatically
downloaded by the recorder overnight. This only
happens if the recorder is in standby; if the recorder
is left on, it will not download. When not using the
recorder, please switch it into standby.
• After I performed the initial set-up I found that the line-
up for all the channels received via the external set top
box is incorrect. How do I correct this?
You can change the line-up in the editor according to
your preferences. Access the Editor Area. Select the
channels that you would like to change. Change the
source and preset number according to your
preferences.
Data downloads can take several hours. The front
panel display shows EPG when downloading. If you
switch the recorder on while EPG is displayed, the
download will be canceled.
• GUIDE Plus+ is not supported in my area, but when I
switch the recorder into standby, after a while the front
panel display shows EPG.. Can I stop this from
happening?
• I performed the set-up but after many hours I still have
a blank EPG what is going wrong?
There are several possibilities:
– Connections are wrong. See Connecting up on
page 12 to double check everything.
If GUIDE Plus+ is not supported in your area, please
do not set the postal code in the GUIDE Plus+ setup
(see Setting up the GUIDE Plus+™ system on
page 27). When GUIDE Plus+ service starts in your
area, please set the postal code again.
– The initial setup of GUIDE Plus+ was completed
incorrectly. Try setting it up again (see Setting up the
GUIDE Plus+™ system on page 27).
– Your cabling and setup is OK, but the recorder has
not been connected for enough time to receive the TV
listings data. Leave the recorder in standby overnight.
48
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Recording
06
CRhaepcteor 6rding
About DVD recording
About HDD recording
This recorder can record on both DVD-R and DVD-RW
media. The main difference between the two is that
DVD-R discs can only be recorded once, while DVD-RW
can be recorded, erased and re-recorded many times.
Recording to the internal hard disk drive (HDD) is very
flexible; you have the full choice of recording quality
options, including manual mode, and of course you can
record, erase and re-record as many times as you like.
Both types of disc can be initialized for Video mode or VR
mode recording. Each has its advantages, and it depends
on what you want to do with the recording which mode
you choose.
The capacity of the hard disk drive means that you can
store many hours of video on it, even using the higher
quality recording modes.
If you want to edit your recordings in any significant way,
VR mode offers greater possibilities for cutting, copying,
and changing the way the video is presented.
Important
• The maximum number of titles/chapters per title that
can be recorded on the HDD is 999 and 99
respectively. No more recording is possible on the
HDD after the maximum number of titles has been
reached.
Video mode is less flexible when it comes to editing, but
it has the advantage that it is compatible with standard
1
DVD players (many of which won’t play VR mode discs ).
Once a disc is initialized for a particular mode, all
recording on that disc will be in that mode.
• The maximum continuous recording time for one title
is 12 hours.
• It is possible to record both PAL and NTSC titles on
the HDD. Before recording, you need to make sure
that the Input Line System setting (page 107)
matches the TV line system of the source you’re
recording.
Important
• The maximum number of titles and chapters that can
be recorded on a VR mode disc is 99 and 999
respectively; on a Video mode disc the maximum
number of titles and chapters is 99 and 99. No more
recording is possible on a disc that already contains
the maximum number of chapters/titles.
HDD Video mode compatibility
When recording to the HDD you can choose to record in
one of two formats. Set the format from the HDD
Recording Format item in the Initial Setup menu (see
page 105).
• Unfinalized Video mode discs are not usable in other
DVD recorders. Likewise, unfinalized video mode
discs recorded using other recorders are not usable
in this recorder.
When set to Video Mode On, high-speed copying from
HDD to Video mode DVD is possible. When recording a
bilingual broadcast, set which channel you want to
record from the Initial Setup menu (see Bilingual
Recording on page 102).
• Pioneer takes no responsibility for recording failure
due to power cuts, defective discs, or damage to the
recorder.
• Fingerprints, dirt and small scratches on a disc can
affect playback and/or recording performance.
Please take proper care of your discs.
When HDD Recording Format is set to Video Mode Off,
high-speed copying isn’t possible. However, both
channels of bilingual broadcasts are recorded and you
can switch the audio on playback.
• See also Disc / content format playback compatibility
on page 9 for detailed disc compatibility information.
• Although this recorder can record PAL, SECAM,
NTSC and PAL-60, you can’t mix multiple TV line
systems on one disc. A disc can contain PAL and
SECAM recordings, or NTSC and PAL-60. See also
Additional information about the TV system settings
on page 107.
Note
1.Some DVD players, such as some Pioneer models, are compatible with VR mode discs. Check the operating instructions for your player for
VR mode compatibility information.
49
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Recording
06
Recording time and picture quality
There are six preset recording quality modes :
Restrictions on video recording
1
You cannot record copy-protected video using this
recorder. Copy-protected video includes DVD-Video discs
and some satellite broadcasts. If copy-protected material
is encountered during a recording, recording will pause
automatically and an error message will be displayed on-
screen.
• XP – High quality setting, gives about one hour of
recording time on a DVD disc.
• SP (Standard Play) – Default quality, used for most
applications, gives about two hours of recording time
on a DVD.
Video that is ‘copy-once only’ can only be recorded on the
HDD or in VR mode (see below).
• LP (Long Play) – Lower video quality than SP, but
doubles the recording time on a DVD to about four
hours.
When recording a TV broadcast or through an external
input, you can display copy control information on
screen. (see Displaying disc information on-screen on
page 35).
• EP (Extended Play) – Lower quality than LP, but gives
about six hours of recording time on a DVD disc.
• SLP (Super Long Play) – Lower quality than EP, but
gives about eight hours of recording time on a DVD
disc.
CPRM
CPRM is a copy protection/scrambling system developed
for the recording of ‘copy once’ broadcast programs.
CPRM stands for Content Protection for Recordable
Media.
• SEP (Super Extended Play) – Lowest video quality but
gives about ten hours of recording time on a DVD
disc.
Please note that there is a trade-off between recording
time and quality. The longer the possible recording time,
the lower the recorded picture quality.
This recorder is CPRM compatible, which means that
you can record copy-once broadcast programs, but you
cannot then make a copy of those recordings. CPRM
recordings can only be made on CPRM-compatible
DVD-R (ver. 2.0/8x or higher) or DVD-RW (ver. 1.1 or
higher) discs formatted in VR mode or on the HDD.
In addition to these settings, when Manual Recording is
On (see Manual Recording on page 104) you can access
32 different recording quality/time settings (MN1–
MN32), a high-quality audio mode (LPCM), and a super-
high quality (data transfer rate of around 15 Mbps) HDD
recording mode (XP+).
DVD CPRM recordings can only be played on players that
are specifically compatible with CPRM.
When setting a timer recording there is a further option,
AUTO, which maximizes the recording quality for the
space available on the disc loaded at the time of
recording. (If recording to the HDD, the recording quality
is maximized to fit on to a DVD disc.)
Recording equipment and copyright
Recording equipment should be used only for lawful
copying and you are advised to check carefully what is
lawful copying in the country in which you are making a
copy. Copying of copyright material such as films or
music is unlawful unless permitted by a legal exception
or consented to by the rightowners.
Recorded audio
• This product incorporates copyright protection
technology that is protected by method claims of
certain U.S. patents and other intellectual property
rights owned by Macrovision Corporation and other
rights owners. Use of this copyright protection
technology must be authorized by Macrovision
Corporation, and is intended for home and other
limited viewing uses only unless otherwise
In all except the LPCM mode, sound is recorded in two
channel Dolby Digital format. When set to LPCM, sound
is recorded in high quality, uncompressed Linear PCM
format.
If the broadcast audio is bilingual and you are recording
in Video mode or to the HDD with the HDD Recording
Format set to Video Mode On, or on the LPCM setting,
use the Bilingual Recording setting (page 102) to select
the A/L or B/R audio channel to record before recording
starts. In other cases, both channels of a bilingual
broadcast will be recorded and you can switch on
playback.
authorized by Macrovision Corporation. Reverse
engineering or disassembly is prohibited.
Note
1.All recording times (both in this manual and those shown by the recorder) are approximate. This is because of the way that the video is re-
corded; you may get slightly more or slightly less, depending on what you’re recording.
50
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Recording
06
Setting the picture quality/recording
time
Basic recording from the TV
VR mode Video mode
HDD
VR mode Video mode
HDD
Follow the instructions below to record a TV program.
Recording starts immediately and continues until the
disc is full or you stop the recording.
Before starting a recording, you will usually want to set
the picture quality/recording time. There are six standard
settings available, which allow you to choose a balance
between picture quality and recording time.
When Manual Recording is set to On (see Manual
Recording on page 104), a further option will be available
(MN1–32, LPCM or XP+, depending on what you set).
ꢄ
ꢃ
HDD
DVD
See also Recording time and picture quality on page 50 for
more information.
CH
REC MODE
AUDIO
ENTER
DVD RECORDER
PAUSE
•
Press REC MODE repeatedly to select a recording
setting.
• XP – High quality
REC
STOP REC REC MODE
• SP – Standard play
• LP – Long play
ì
• EP – Extended play
• SLP – Super Long play
• SEP – Super Extended play
1
2
DVD RECORDER
• MN / LPCM / XP+ – Manual / Linear PCM / XP+
(available only when manual recording is on)
The setting is indicated in the front panel display, and
shown on-screen together with the recording time for a
blank recordable disc. If a recordable disc is loaded, the
approximate remaining recording time for that disc is
also shown. (Note that if the On Screen Display setting
(see On-Screen Display on page 106) is Off then this
information is not displayed.)
1
Press HDD or DVD to record to the hard disk drive
or a recordable DVD respectively.
• If you’re recording to DVD, load a recordable disc (if
you load a new blank DVD-RW disc, the recorder
takes a short while to initialize the disc).
2
Use the CH +/– buttons to select the TV channel
to record.
The front panel display shows the channel number:
Channel preset
Note
1.Audio is recorded in 16-bit Linear PCM format, video is recorded at XP quality. When recording a bilingual broadcast, select which audio chan-
nel to record (see Bilingual Recording on page 102).
2.Applicable only to HDD recording. (If this setting is used when recording to DVD, MN32 is used.) When copied to DVD, XP+ recordings are
always copied in real time.
51
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Recording
06
• While the recorder is stopped, you can also use the
number buttons on the remote to select the channel.
(For channel 6, press 6 then ENTER; for channel 24,
press 2, 4 then ENTER)
Tip
• During recording you can turn on/off the SCART loop
through function. During recording, press the front
panel + button to switch to SCART THRU (loop
through on), or – to switch to SCART NORM (loop
though off). Note that you can’t switch loop through
on if recording from the AV2/(INPUT 1/DECODER)
or AV1(RGB)-TV connectors. Also, loop through is
automatically reset to off after recording has
finished.
• If the recorder is stopped, you can also use the +/–
buttons on the front panel to select the channel
number.
3
Use the REC MODE button to set the picture
quality/recording time.
• See Setting the picture quality/recording time above
for detailed instructions.
4
Use the AUDIO button to select the audio
Direct recording from TV
channel to record.
If you connected this recorder to your TV using a SCART
cable, and your TV supports Direct Recording, you can
record whatever is currently being shown on the TV
without having to worry about what channel preset the
recorder is on. Check the instructions that came with
your TV if you’re not sure whether your TV supports this
feature.
See Changing audio channels on page 31 for more on
this.
• When recording in VR mode, if a broadcast is
bilingual, both audio channels are recorded, allowing
you to switch the audio channel on playback. The
only exception to this is when the picture quality is set
to LPCM, in which case you do need to select the
audio channel before recording.
PAUSE
5
Press ì REC to start recording.
If you want to set a recording end time, press the ì REC
button repeatedly. The recording time increases in 30
minute increments, up to a maximum of six hours. The
time the recording will end is shown on-screen and in the
front panel display. When the recording ends, the
recorder automatically switches into standby if no other
operation is being performed.
REC
STOP REC REC MODE
ì
TV DIRECT
REC
• To cancel the set recording time, press ì REC.
1
2
If necessary, load a recordable disc.
• If you want to pause recording at any time, press
ꢋ PAUSE. Press again to restart the recording. (If
recording to the HDD or in VR mode, a new chapter
is started after recording restarts)
Set the picture quality/recording time using the
REC MODE button.
3
Press TV DIRECT REC to start recording.
If you want to set a recording time, press the ì REC
button repeatedly. The recording time increases in 30
minute increments, up to a maximum of six hours. You
can see the recording time on-screen and in the front
panel display. When the recording ends, the recorder
automatically switches into standby if no other operation
is being performed.
6
To stop the recording, press ꢀ STOP REC.
• If you set the recording time in the previous step, you
can still stop the recording anytime by pressing ꢀ
STOP REC.
• Recording will stop automatically when there is no
more space on the HDD/DVD, or after 12 hours of
HDD recording (whichever is sooner).
• To cancel the set recording time, press ì REC.
If VPS/PDC is active for two timer programs that are
programmed to start at the same time, then the
program that actually starts first takes priority.
• If you want to pause recording at any time, press
ꢋ PAUSE. Press again to restart the recording. (If
recording to the HDD or in VR mode, a new chapter
is started after recording restarts)
4
To stop the recording, press ꢀ STOP REC.
• If you set the recording time in step 3, you can still
stop the recording anytime by pressing ꢀ STOP REC.
• Recording will stop automatically when there is no
more space on the HDD/DVD, or after 12 hours of
HDD recording (whichever is sooner).
52
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Recording
06
Important
Tip
• A timer recording can’t be set if there are already 32
timer programs waiting to be recorded.
• You can press TV DIRECT REC while the recorder is
in standby to switch on and immediately start
recording.
• Timer recording will not start if:
– The recorder is already recording.
– A disc is being initialized, finalized or unfinalized.
• Please note that you can’t record from another
component (VCR, etc.) that is connected by a SCART
cable to the AV2/(INPUT 1/DECODER) connector
using the TV Direct Recording feature.
• Timer recording will start when the operation
preventing timer recording has finished.
• If a recordable DVD that doesn’t support
simultaneous playback and recording (see
Simultaneous recording and playback on page 56) is
playing when a DVD timer recording is due to start,
playback will automatically stop to allow the
recording to start.
Setting a timer recording
VR mode Video mode
HDD
Using the timer recording features you can program up
to 32 timer recordings up to a month in advance. Timer
recording programs can be set to record just once, every
day, or every week.
• The timer indicator ( ) lights in the front panel
display when the timer is active. If the indicator is
blinking it means that (for a DVD timer recording)
there is no disc loaded, or the disc loaded is not
recordable (for an HDD timer recording it means that
the HDD is not recordable).
There are two ways to program a timer recording; using
the GUIDE Plus+ system (see The Schedule Area on
page 43) or using the Easy Timer Recording feature (see
Easy Timer Recording below).
• Approximately two minutes before a timer recording
is set to start, the recorder will go into timer recording
standby. In timer recording standby you cannot use
some functions.
You can set the recording quality for your timer recording
in the same way as for a regular recording, but with the
added option of an AUTO mode, which maximizes the
recording quality for the space available on the disc (if
recording to DVD), or to fit on to a blank DVD disc (if
recording to HDD).
• The maximum length for timer recordings made to
the HDD is 24 hours. However, because one title
(HDD) is limited to 12 hours, recordings over 12
hours will be spread over two titles. Note that there
will be a break in the recording of a few seconds
between titles.
You can set timer recordings to record to a recordable
DVD or to the hard disk drive. For regular (daily or weekly)
HDD timer recordings that you don’t need to keep, you
can use the Auto Replace Recording feature to
automatically replace the previous timer recording with
the new one. Note that when you use this feature, the
previous recording made on that timer program will be
replaced by the next one, regardless of whether you have
watched it yet or not.
• VPS/PDC may not work with all broadcast stations in
your country/area. Check with the stations for
compatibility.
• The hours between 3:00 and 5:00 in the morning are
used by GUIDE Plus+ to download program
information. During these times, VPS/PDC may not
work reliably; leave VPS/PDC off if you set a timer
recording for these times.
You can also set the recorder so that it will adjust the
recording quality to try and fit the recording on to the disc
if it would not otherwise fit at the recording quality you set
(see Optimized Rec on page 104 for more on this).
Finally, if you set a timer recording to record to DVD but
there isn’t a recordable DVD loaded at the time of the
recording, the Recovery Recording feature will
automatically record the program to the HDD for you.
This recorder is compatible with VPS (Video
Programming System) and PDC (Program Delivery
Control) systems used by many TV stations to ensure that
a timer recording catches the whole program even when
the program is not running to schedule. Up to eight timer
programs can be set with VPS/PDC on.
53
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Recording
06
2
Set the TV channel and recording quality.
Easy Timer Recording
As the name suggests, Easy Timer Recording makes
1
Easy Timer
setting up a timer recording as simple as possible.
8:00
SAT
9:00
10:00
11:00
12:00
13:00
14:00
1/01
2/01
3/01
1/01
9:30 – ––:––
HDD
DVD
+ –
/
CHANNEL
REC MODE
HDD/DVD
Pr 7
SP
HDD
• Use the CH +/– buttons to set the channel you want
to record.
CH
• Use the REC MODE button to set the recording
quality. Press repeatedly to switch between XP, SP,
LP, EP, SLP, SEP and AUTO (and MN if manual
recording mode is on).
• DVD recording: The AUTO option automatically sets
the best recording quality for the space available on
the disc loaded at the time of recording.
ENTER
HOME
MENU
RETURN
• HDD recording: The AUTO option automatically sets
the best recording quality that would fit on to a blank
DVD disc.
REV SCAN
FWD SCAN
• Press DVD to record to DVD disc, or HDD if you want
to record to the hard disk drive.
3
Use ꢀ/ꢁ/ꢂ/ꢃ to move the cursor to the
REC MODE
recording start date and time on the grid.
• You can move the cursor forward or back an hour at
a time using the ꢉ and ꢊ buttons.
Current time
Recording start time
DVD RECORDER
Easy Timer
8:00
9:00
10:00
11:00
12:00
13:00
14:00
1/01
2/01
3/01
1
Press HOME MENU and select Easy Timer.
SAT
1/01 11:45 – ––:––
+ –
/
CHANNEL
REC MODE
HDD/DVD
Pr 7
SP
HDD
Disc Navigator
GUIDE Plus+
Easy Timer
Disc Setup
Initial Setup
Video/Audio Adjust
Copy
Each row of the grid is one day (you can set the timer
recording for up to a month in advance). Each column is
a 15 minute interval.
Play Mode
Photo Viewer
Jukebox
The darker area represents time that has already passed
and can’t therefore be selected. The lighter area is time
that’s available.
4
Press ENTER to set the start time.
The start date and time is displayed in the middle of the
screen.
• You can go back and reset the start time if you need
to by pressing RETURN.
Note
1.You can’t use VPS/PDC with Easy Timer Recording. Set a scheduled recording using GUIDE Plus+ if you want to use VPS/PDC.
54
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Recording
06
5
Use the ꢂ/ꢃ to move the cursor to the
Canceling and stopping a timer recording in
progress
recording end time on the grid.
After a timer recording has started, you can cancel the
program (but continue recording), or stop recording
completely if you need to.
Recording start time
Recording end time
Easy Timer
11:00
1/01
12:00
13:00
14:00
15:00
16:00
17:00
2/01
3/01
REC
STOP REC
SAT
1/01
11:45 – 13:45
ì
+ –
/
CHANNEL
REC MODE
HDD/DVD
Pr 7
SP
HDD
1
During timer recording, press and hold ì REC for
As you move the cursor around the grid, an arrow
stretches from the start time to the current cursor
position, representing the length of the recording. A
recording of up to six hours can be set.
three seconds.
Only the program is canceled (the timer indicator
disappears); recording continues so that you can
manually stop recording whenever you like.
6
Press ENTER to set the end time.
2
When you want to stop recording completely,
7
Select ‘Yes’ to set the timer recording and exit, or
press ꢀ STOP REC.
‘No’ to go back to the timer recording screen.
• You can check the timer recording details you just set
from the Schedule Area in GUIDE Plus+; see The
Schedule Area on page 43).
Tip
• You can also stop a timer recording immediately by
pressing ꢀ STOP REC then selecting Yes to confirm.
Extending a timer recording in progress
You can extend a timer recording beyond the
programmed end time in two different ways. This can be
useful if a broadcast program overruns, for example.
Preventing use of the recorder before a
timer recording (child lock)
You can make all the front panel and remote control
buttons inoperative using the child lock feature. This is
useful when you set a timer recording and want to make
sure that the timer settings are not changed before
recording has finished.
ENTER
HOME
MENU
1
If the recorder is on, switch it into standby.
2
Press and hold ꢅ STOP on the front panel for
three seconds to lock the controls.
The front panel display briefly shows LOCK. If any buttons
are pressed on the remote or front panel, LOCK is briefly
displayed again.
• To unlock the recorder, press and hold ꢅ STOP on
the front panel for three seconds until the display
shows UNLOCK.
REC
STOP REC
TIMER REC
ì
• To cancel a timer recording when the recorder is
locked, first unlock the recorder (see above), then
press and hold ì REC for three seconds.
Moving the end time by 30-minute blocks
During timer recording, press and hold ì REC for
1
three seconds.
The timer indicator disappears from the front panel
display.
2
Press ì REC repeatedly to extend recording in 30
minute increments.
55
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Recording
06
Timer recording FAQ
Simultaneous recording and
playback
Frequently Asked Questions
VR mode
HDD
• Even though the timer is set, the recorder doesn’t start
recording!
A feature called Chase Play makes it possible to watch a
recording in progress (DVD or HDD) from the start of the
recording (as in, playback is ‘chasing’ the recording). For
example, perhaps you have to miss the first 30 minutes of
a movie on TV; you can start recording, then start
watching the movie, from the beginning, while the
recorder is still recording 30 minutes ahead of you.
Check that the disc loaded or HDD is recordable, not
locked (see Lock Disc on page 95), and that there are
fewer than 99/999 titles already on the DVD/HDD.
• The recorder won’t let me enter a timer program! Why
not?
In fact, you’re not just limited to watching the recording
in progress; you can watch anything else already on the
DVD or HDD by selecting it from the Disc Navigator
screen (see Using the Disc Navigator with recordable
discs and the HDD on page 62).
You can’t enter a timer program if the clock isn’t set.
• What happens when two or more timer programs
overlap?
Basically, the program with the earlier recording start
time has priority. However, the recorder will start
recording the program with the later start time after
the earlier program is finished. If two programs have
the same times (but different channels, for example),
the program set most recently takes priority.
Important
• Note that you must use a DVD-RW Ver. 1.1 / 2x or
Ver. 1.2 disc to be able to use this feature.
• You may not be able to use this feature with a
DVD-RW disc that was first initialized on another
recorder.
If VPS/PDC is active for two timer programs that are
programmed to start at the same time, then the
program that actually starts first takes priority.
• Chase playback is not possible using a VR mode
DVD-R disc.
•
During recording, press ꢆ PLAY to start playback
1
from the beginning of the current recording , or
press DISC NAVIGATOR and select another title to
play from there.
You can use all the usual playback controls, such as
2
pause, slow-motion play, scan and skip.
• To stop playback, press ꢅ STOP (recording will
continue).
• To stop recording, press ꢀ STOP REC (playback will
continue).
• During recording or in timer recording standby, you
can’t play an HDD title, DVD or Video CD/Super VCD
disc if the Input Line System setting doesn’t match
the TV line system of the disc/HDD title (see also
Additional information about the TV system settings
on page 107). Also, during simultaneous recording
and playback, if the TV line system of the playback
track/title changes then playback will automatically
stop.
Note
1.You can’t start playback immediately after recording starts. Simultaneous playback and recording doesn’t work while copying or backing up.
2.When scanning a DVD, no sound is output if the recorder is also recording the DVD (see Scanning discs on page 64).
56
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Recording
06
• If the aspect ratio is distorted (squashed or
stretched), adjust on the source component or your
TV before recording.
Recording from an external
component
3
4
Set up the recorder.
VR mode Video mode
HDD
• Use REC MODE to set the recording quality. See
Setting the picture quality/recording time on page 51
for detailed information.
You can record from an external component, such as a
camcorder or VCR, connected to one of the recorder’s
external inputs.
• Press HDD to record to the hard disk drive, or DVD to
record to a DVD.
Press ì REC when you’re ready to start
recording.
• The recorder will only start recording from the DV IN
jack if there is a valid signal. Recording will also
pause if the signal is interrupted during recording.
HDD
DVD
INPUT
SELECT
• If your source is copy-protected using CopyGuard,
you will not be able to record it. See Restrictions on
video recording on page 50 for more details.
REC
REC MODE
ì
1
Make sure that the component you want to
record from is connected properly to the DVD
recorder.
See Chapter 2 (Connecting up) for connection options.
2
Press INPUT SELECT repeatedly to select one of
the external inputs to record from.
There are three analog inputs and a DV digital input. The
current input is shown on-screen and in the front panel
display:
1
• AV2/L1 – Input 1
• L2 – Input 2 (front panel)
• L3 – Input 3
• DV – DV input (front panel)
Check that the Audio In settings for External Audio,
Bilingual Recording and DV Input are as you want them
(see Audio In Settings on page 102).
Note
1.This cannot be selected if AV2/L1 In is set to Decoder (see AV2/L1 In on page 102).
57
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Recording
06
Important
Recording from a DV camcorder
• The source signal must be DVC-SD format
VR mode Video mode
HDD
• Some camcorders cannot be controlled using this
recorder’s remote.
You can record from a DV camcorder connected to the
DV IN jack on the front panel of this recorder. Using the
recorder’s remote, you can control both the camcorder
and this recorder.
• If you connect a second recorder using a DV cable,
you cannot control the second unit from this one.
• You can’t control this unit remotely from a
component connected to the DV IN jack.
Before recording, make sure that the audio input for the
DV IN jack is setup (see DV Input on page 103).
• You can’t record date and time information from DV
cassette.
• During DV recording, if a part of the tape is blank, or
has copy-protected material on it, this recorder will
pause recording. Recording will restart automatically
when there is a recordable signal. However, if there is
more than 10 seconds of blank tape, this recorder will
stop recording and the camcorder should stop
(depending on the camcorder).
HDD
DVD
• For best results when recording from a DV
camcorder to this recorder, we recommend cueing
the camcorder to the place you want to start
recording from and setting the camcorder to play-
pause.
1
Make sure your digital camcorder is connected to
ENTER
HOME
MENU
the front panel DV IN jack.
RETURN
Also, set the camcorder to VTR mode.
2
Set up the recorder.
REV SCAN
PLAY
FWD SCAN
• Use REC MODE to set the recording quality. See
Setting the picture quality/recording time on page 51
for detailed information.
PAUSE STOP
STEP/SLOW
• Make sure a recordable disc is loaded if you want to
record to DVD.
ꢈ
REC MODE
ꢇ
ì
3
From the Initial Settings menu, check that the DV
audio input is setup as you require.
See DV Input on page 103 for more on this.
• Check also that the Audio In settings for External
Audio and Bilingual Recording are as you want
them (see Audio In Settings on page 102).
DVD RECORDER
4
Press HOME MENU, select ‘Copy’, then ‘DV
Record’ from the menu.
• DV recording only works when the digital camcorder
is in VTR mode with a tape loaded.
5
Select ‘Record to HDD’ or ‘Record to DVD’ to
record to the hard disk drive or a recordable DVD
respectively.
6
Find the place on the camcorder tape that you
want to start recording from.
For best results, pause playback at the point from which
you want to record.
58
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Recording
06
• Depending on your camcorder, you can use this
recorder’s remote to control the camcorder using the
ꢀ , ꢁ , ꢂ , ꢃ , ꢄ , ꢅ and ꢆ buttons.
Playing your recordings on other DVD
players
7
Use the ꢀ/ꢁ buttons to select ‘Start Rec’ and
press ENTER.
VR mode Video mode
Most regular DVD players can play finalized discs
recorded in Video mode. A number of players (including
many Pioneer models) can also play DVD-RW discs
recorded in VR mode, finalized or not. Most players will
not play VR mode DVD-R discs, although some DVD-
ROM drives and DVD recorders may be able to
(finalization might be necessary). Check the manual that
came with the player to check what kinds of discs it will
play.
ꢀStop
1.02.22
ꢀStop
Control with these
Start Rec
Pause Rec
Stop Rec
buttons
ꢃ
ꢂ
ꢁ
ꢀ
ꢄ
ꢅ
ꢆ
HDD
Rem.
SP (2h00m/DVD)
32h45m
When you finalize a Video mode disc, a title menu is
created from which you can select titles when you play
the disc. There are a number of different styles of title
menu to choose from to suit the content of the disc.
• Recording is automatically paused if the recorder
detects no signal, or a copy-protected signal.
Recording restarts when there is a non-copy-
protected signal.
All the title menus are navigated in the usual way,
pressing MENU or TOP MENU to display the menu, then
using the ꢀ/ꢁ/ꢂ/ꢃ followed by ENTER to select titles
and start playback.
• You can pause or stop the recording by selecting
Pause Rec or Stop Rec from the on-screen display.
You cannot control the camcorder from this remote
control during recording.
• If you restart recording after stopping the camcorder,
the first few seconds of the camcorder tape will not
be recorded. Use the pause button on your
camcorder instead and recording will start
immediately.
Finalizing a disc
VR mode Video mode
Finalizing ‘fixes’ the recordings in place so that the disc
can be played on a regular DVD player or computer
equipped with a suitable DVD-ROM drive.
• HDD and DVD-RW (VR Mode) only: A chapter marker
is inserted every time there is a break in the timecode
on the DV tape. This happens when the recording is
stopped or paused then restarted, for example.
2
Note that the disc name will appear in the title menu after
you finalize a disc. Make sure the disc name is as you
want it before you finalize the disc as it can’t be changed
afterwards. If you want to rename the disc, see Input Disc
Name on page 95 before starting the steps below.
• While recording, you cannot exit the DV recording
screen using the HOME MENU or RETURN button.
• See also DV-related messages on page 115 if you
encounter an error while using the DV IN jack.
Important
• Once you’ve finalized a disc recorded in Video mode,
you can’t edit or record anything else on that disc.
However, the finalization on a DVD-RW disc maybe
‘undone’; see Undo Finalize on page 96 for how to do
this.
Frequently Asked Questions
• I can’t get my DV camcorder to work with the recorder!
Check that the DV cable is properly connected. Also
make sure that what you’re trying to record is not
copy-protected.
• A VR mode disc can still be recorded and edited on
this recorder even after finalizing.
If it still doesn’t work, try switching off the camcorder
then switch back on.
1
Load the disc you want to finalize.
Make sure that the recorder is stopped before
proceeding.
• There’s a picture, but no sound!
Try switching the DV Input setting (see DV Input on
1
page 103) between Stereo 1 and Stereo 2.
Note
1.If the audio subcode on the DV tape cannot be read correctly, the audio type will not switch automatically. You can switch the audio manually
from the External Audio setting (page 102).
2.If the TV line system of the disc is different to the current setting of the recorder, you will not be able to finalize the disc. See Additional infor-
mation about the TV system settings on page 107 for how to change the recorder’s setting.
59
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Recording
06
2
3
Press HOME MENU and select ‘Disc Setup’.
Select ‘Finalize’.
Initializing a recordable DVD disc
When you first load a blank disc, the recorder will
initialize it automatically for recording. You can also
manually initialize discs for either Video mode recording
Disc Setup
Next Screen
Start
Basic
Finalize
Initialize
Undo Finalize
1
or VR mode recording.
Finalize
Optimize HDD
By default, the recorder initializes blank DVD-RW discs
for VR mode recording. See DVD-RW Auto Init. on
page 105 if you want to change the default to Video
mode.
DVD-R discs are ready for Video mode recordings out of
the box; if you want to use a DVD-R for VR mode
recording, you must do it before recording anything else
on the disc.
4
Select ‘Finalize’ from the finalize options, then
‘Next Screen’.
5
For Video mode discs only, select a title menu
style, then select ‘Yes’ to start finalization or ‘No’ to
cancel.
Important
The menu you select will be the one that appears when
the ‘top menu’ is selected on any DVD player.
• Initializing a DVD-RW disc will erase everything
recorded on it. Make sure there is nothing on the disc
that you want to keep!
Finalize
TITLE MENU
• You may not be able to re-initialize a DVD-RW disc in
a different format if it was originally initialized on an
older DVD recorder.
• Once initialized for VR mode recording, you can’t re-
initialize a DVD-R back to Video mode.
1
2
Press HOME MENU and select ‘Disc Setup’.
Select ‘Initialize’
• Discs recorded partially or fully on the Pioneer
DVR-7000 DVD recorder do not support this feature.
These discs will have only a text title menu when
finalized on this recorder.
Disc Setup
Start
Start
Basic
VR Mode
Initialize
Finalize
Video Mode
6
The recorder will now start finalizing the disc.
Optimize HDD
During finalization:
• If the finalization process of a DVD-RW disc is going
to take more than around four minutes, you can
press ENTER to cancel. Around four minutes before
completion, the option to cancel disappears.
3
Select ‘Video Mode’ or ‘VR Mode’ from the
initialize options.
• You can’t cancel the finalization of a VR mode DVD-R
disc.
4
Select ‘Start’.
• How long finalization takes depends on the type of
disc, how much is recorded on the disc and the
number of titles on the disc. A disc recorded in VR
mode can take up to one hour to finalize. A disc
recorded in Video mode can take up to 20 minutes.
It takes about 30 seconds to initialize the disc.
Initializing Disc
Pr 1
1 min left
Note
1.If a disc was previously finalized on an older DVD recorder, you may not be able to re-initialize and/or initialize it for Video mode recording.
60
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playback
07
CPhlaapteyr b7 ack
Introduction
Navigating discs and the HDD
Most of the features described in this chapter make use
of on-screen displays. Navigate these using the ꢀ/ꢁ/ꢂ/
ꢃand ENTER. To go back one level from any screen, use
the RETURN button. Remember also that the button
guide at the bottom of every screen shows which buttons
do what.
ALL
During playback you can easily jump to another title,
chapter or track on a disc using the number buttons on
the remote.
Many of the functions covered in this chapter apply to the
HDD, DVD discs, Video CDs, Super VCDs, WMA/MP3
discs and CDs, although the exact operation of some
varies slightly with the kind of disc loaded. The following
icons are provided to help you quickly identify which
instructions you need for which kind of disc.
DVD
Any kind of DVD, DVD-R or DVD-RW
DVD-Video
Commercially produced DVD or finalized
ENTER
Video mode DVD-R/RW
Video mode
Video mode DVD-R/RW (unfinalized)
VR mode
VR mode DVD-R/RW
HDD
HDD
DVD-Video Video mode
CD
Audio CD
1
During playback use the number buttons to
enter a chapter number within the current title.
For example, for chapter 6, press 6; for chapter 24,
press 2, then 4.
Video CD
Video CD
Super VCD
Super VCD
• To clear and start again, press CLEAR.
WMA/MP3
WMA or MP3 files
2
Optionally: Press ENTER.
• Alternatively, just wait a few seconds and playback
will jump to the new chapter.
• Some DVD-Video discs don’t allow certain playback
controls to operate at certain points in the disc. This
is not a malfunction.
HDD
VR mode
• When playing Video CDs, some functions, such as
making a program list, are not available in PBC
mode. Stop the disc first, then start playback by
pressing ꢍ.
1
During playback, use the number buttons to
input a title number.
For example, for title 6, press 6; for title 24, press 2,
then 4.
• For discs that contain JPEG picture files, see The
PhotoViewer on page 93.
• To clear and start again, press CLEAR.
2
Optionally: Press ENTER.
• Alternatively, just wait a few seconds and playback
will jump to the new title.
61
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playback
07
• You can change the thumbnail picture displayed for
a title; see Set Thumbnail on page 84.
CD
Video CD
Super VCD
WMA/MP3
1
During playback, use the number buttons to
4
To play the highlighted title, press ENTER.
• You can also select Play from the command menu
options.
input a track number.
For example, for track 6, press 6; for track 24, press 2,
then 4.
• To clear and start again, press CLEAR.
Tip
2
Optionally: Press ENTER.
• Use the time search feature to find a particular point
on a DVD or within a title on the HDD. See Search
Mode on page 65 for more information.
• Alternatively, just wait a few seconds and playback
will jump to the new track.
Changing the display style of the Disc
Navigator
You can choose to display titles in the Disc Navigator in
various different ways, sorted alphabetically, by
recording date, by genre, and so on. You can also choose
whether to display four or eight titles on the screen at the
same time.
Using the Disc Navigator to browse
the contents of a disc.
Use the Disc Navigator to browse the contents of a disc
and start playback.
Using the Disc Navigator with recordable
discs and the HDD
1
From the Disc Navigator’s title list, press ꢂ to
display the view options panel.
VR mode Video mode
HDD
The View Options panel
You can use the Disc Navigator to browse and edit video
on recordable DVDs and the HDD, and to view
information on titles.
Disc Navigator (HDD)
10Titles
23:00 FRI 3/12
Style
4
23:00 Fri 3/12 Pr
4
SP
See also Editing on page 81 for more on editing
recordable discs.
Titles
2h00m(1.0G)
Sort order
7
20:00 FRI 3/12
20:00 Fri 3/12 Pr
9
SP
Recent First
1
Press HDD or DVD to select the hard disk drive or
2h00m(1.0G)
Genre
22:00 THU 2/12
22:00 Thu 2/12 Pr
DVD.
All Genres
7
SP
1h00m(1.0G)
2
Press HOME MENU and select ‘Disc Navigator’
19:00 MON 29/11
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr
HDD
SP
2
SP
from the on-screen display.
Alternatively, you can press DISC NAVIGATOR to go
straight to the Disc Navigator screen.
1h00m(1.0G)
Remain
30h30m
2
Use the ꢀ/ꢁ buttons to select ‘Style’, ‘Sort
Order’ or ‘Genre’, then press ENTER to see the
available view options.
• Style – Select four or eight titles per screen view
3
Use the ꢀ/ꢁ buttons to browse up and down the
list of titles.
Disc Navigator (HDD)
10
10Titles
Disc Navigator (HDD)
10Titles
23:00 FRI 3/12
23:00 Fri 3/12 Pr
4
SP
2h00m(1.0G)
23:00 FRI 3/12
Style
4
4
Titles
23:00 Fri 3/12 Pr
4
SP
2h00m(1.0G)
4
Titles
Titles
9
8
7
20:00 FRI 3/12
20:00 Fri 3/12 Pr
8
9
SP
2h00m(1.0G)
Sort
Cancel
Re
7
20:00 FRI 3/12
Recent First
All Genres
20:00 Fri 3/12 Pr
9
SP
2h00m(1.0G)
22:00 THU 2/12
22:00 Thu 2/12 Pr
7
SP
Genr
22:00 THU 2/12
22:00 Thu 2/12 Pr
1h00m(1.0G)
A
7
SP
19:00 MON 29/11
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr
1h00m(1.0G)
HDD
SP
2
SP
19:00 MON 29/11
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr
1h00m(1.0G)
HDD
SP
Remain
30h30m
Remain
30h30m
2
SP
1h00m(1.0G)
• Use the ꢀ/ꢁ buttons to display the previous/
next page of titles, if there are more titles than can fit
on to the screen.
• You can change the style and order in which titles are
displayed from the view options menu. See below for
more on this.
62
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playback
07
• Sort Order – Sort by date (most recent first),
unwatched first, title name or recording date (oldest
first)
Using the Disc Navigator with playback-only
discs
DVD-Video
CD
Video CD
Super VCD WMA/MP3
Disc Navigator (HDD)
10Titles
1
Press HOME MENU and select ‘Disc Navigator’
23:00 FRI 3/12
from the on-screen display.
Style
4
23:00 Fri 3/12 Pr
4
SP
2h00m(1.0G)
Recent first
New first
Alternatively, for a CD, Video CD, Super VCD or WMA/
MP3 disc, you can press DISC NAVIGATOR, which takes
you straight to the Disc Navigator screen.
By title
Sort
20:00 FRI 3/12
20:00 Fri 3/12 Pr
By rec.date
9
SP
2h00m(1.0G)
Re
Cancel
Genr
7
22:00 THU 2/12
22:00 Thu 2/12 Pr
A
7
SP
1h00m(1.0G)
19:00 MON 29/11
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr
HDD
SP
2
SP
1h00m(1.0G)
Remain
30h30m
Disc Navigator
GUIDE Plus+
Easy Timer
Disc Setup
Initial Setup
Video/Audio Adjust
Copy
• Genre – Display all genres or just a selected genre
Play Mode
Disc Navigator (HDD)
10Titles
Photo Viewer
Jukebox
23:00 FRI 3/12
Style
4
23:00 Fri 3/12 Pr
4
SP
2h00m(1.0G)
All Genres
No Category
Movies
Sort
20:00 FRI 3/12
Sport
20:00 Fri 3/12 Pr
9
SP
2h00m(1.0G)
2
Select what you want to play.
Use the ꢀ/ꢁ/ꢂ/ꢃ to highlight items and ENTER to
Re
Children
Other
Genr
Free
1
22:00 THU 2/12
22:00 Thu 2/12 Pr
A
7
SP
select.
1h00m(1.0G)
7
Depending on the type of disc you have loaded, the Disc
Navigator looks slightly different.
19:00 MON 29/11
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr
HDD
SP
Remain
30h30m
2
SP
1h00m(1.0G)
• When a DVD is loaded, titles are shown on the left,
chapters on the right. Select a title, or a chapter
within a title.
3
Use the ꢀ/ꢁ buttons to select an option, then
press ENTER.
The title list display is updated according to the new
display preferences.
1
• When a CD or Video CD/Super VCD is loaded, a list
of the tracks is displayed.
4
Press ꢃ to return to the title list.
• When a WMA/MP3 disc is loaded, a list of folders and
tracks is displayed (as shown below). Select a folder
or a track within a folder.
HDD
DVD
Disc Navigator
Folder (01-03)
01.Rock
Track(001-004)
001.Intro
CD
WMA/MP3
02.Pop
002.Escape
03.Dance
003.Everything You Say
004.What I Do
DISC NAVIGATOR
Playback starts after you press ENTER.
ENTER
• For discs that contain both CD-Audio tracks and
WMA/MP3 tracks, you can switch the playback area
between CD and WMA/MP3. This can only be done
while the disc is stopped.
HOME
MENU
Note
1.It’s not possible to use the Disc Navigator when playing a Video CD/Super VCD in PBC mode.
63
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playback
07
Scanning discs
Playing in slow motion
You can fast scan discs at various speeds, forwards or
DVD
HDD
Video CD
Super VCD
1
backward.
You can play video at various slow motion speeds. DVDs
and video on the HDD can be played in slow motion in
either direction, while Video CD/Super VCDs can only be
REV SCAN
PLAY
FWD SCAN
3
played forwards in slow motion.
1
During playback, press ꢉ or ꢊ to start
PLAY
reverse or forward scanning.
• The scanning speed is shown on-screen.
2
Press the same button repeatedly to increase the
STEP/SLOW
scanning speed.
ꢈ
ꢇ
DVD
HDD
1
Press ꢈ or ꢇ to start slow motion reverse or
• Forward:
forward playback.
SCAN 1 (1.5x Quick View) ꢄ SCAN 2 ꢄ SCAN 3 ꢄ
SCAN 4
2
Press the same button repeatedly to change the
• Reverse:
slow motion speed.
2
Reverse play ꢄ SCAN 1 ꢄ SCAN 2 ꢄ SCAN 3
ꢄ SCAN 4
SLOW 1/16
SLOW 1/2
SLOW 1/8
SLOW 1/4
CD
Video CD
Super VCD
WMA/MP3
3
To resume normal playback, press ꢆ PLAY.
• Forward/Reverse:
SCAN 1 ꢄ SCAN 2
3
To resume normal playback, press ꢆ PLAY.
Note
1.• Only analog audio is output when scanning audio CDs.
• No subtitles are displayed when scanning DVDs.
• Analog and digital sound is output when scanning DVDs with Dolby Digital or Linear PCM sound on forward SCAN 1. (Linear PCM is output
from the optical digital output, Except during chase playback and simultaneous recording/playback) No sound is output when using other
scan speeds.
• No sound is output when scanning from the HDD, except on forward SCAN 1. (Linear PCM is output from the optical digital output during
forward SCAN 1).
• Depending on the disc, normal playback may automatically resume when a new chapter is reached on a DVD disc.
2.Depending on the disc, reverse playback may not be smooth.
3.• The picture quality during slow motion playback is not as good as during normal playback and depends on the disc being played.
• Reverse slow-motion playback may not be as smooth as forward and may be better with some discs than others.
• Depending on the disc, normal playback may automatically resume when a new chapter is reached on a DVD disc.
• No sound is output during slow-motion playback.
64
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playback
07
Frame advance/frame reverse
DVD
HDD
Video CD
Super VCD
You can advance or back up video on a DVD disc or the
HDD frame-by-frame. With Video CD/Super VCDs, you
can only use frame advance.
CLEAR
CLEAR
1
PLAY MODE
ENTER
PLAY
PAUSE
STEP/SLOW
PLAY
ꢈ
ꢇ
1
Press PLAY MODE to display the Play Mode menu
1
2
During playback, press ꢋ PAUSE.
screen.
Press ꢈ or ꢇ to back up or advance one frame.
• Hold down ꢈ or ꢇ for continuous frame reverse/
frame advance.
Play Mode
Time Search
Title Search
Chapter Search
Search Mode
A-B Repeat
Repeat
Program
3
To resume normal playback, press ꢆ PLAY.
The Play Mode menu
• You can also access the Play Mode menu from the
Home Menu (press HOME MENU).
ALL
2
Use the ꢀ/ꢁ/ꢂ/ꢃ and ENTER to navigate.
• To exit the Play Mode menu, press HOME MENU or
PLAY MODE.
The Play Mode menu gives you access to search
functions, repeat and program play functions.
Important
Search Mode
• You can’t use the Play Mode features with Video CD/
Super VCDs playing in PBC mode, or while a DVD
disc menu is being displayed. For other restrictions,
see the following sections.
ALL
The Search Mode feature lets you start playback from a
specified point in a disc by time or by title/chapter/
2
folder/track number.
1
2
Select ‘Search Mode’ from the Play Mode menu.
Select one of the search options.
Note
1.• The picture quality when using frame reverse is not as good as frame advance.
• Depending on the disc, normal playback may automatically resume when a new chapter is reached on a DVD disc.
2.When using time search, playback may occasionally start slightly before or after the time you input.
65
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playback
07
3
Use the number buttons to enter a title/chapter/
3
With ‘B (Loop End)’ highlighted, press ENTER at
folder/track number or the search time (in hours,
minutes & seconds).
the point you want the loop to end.
Playback immediately jumps back to the start point and
plays the loop round and round.
Play Mode
• When playing a DVD-Video/Video mode DVD, or from
the HDD, the start and end points of the loop must be
in the same title.
Time Search
Title Search
Chapter Search
Input Time
0.00.00
Search Mode
A-B Repeat
Repeat
Program
4
To resume normal playback, select ‘Off’ from the
A-B Repeat menu.
• You can also press CLEAR to cancel A-B Repeat play
if no menu OSD (such as the Play Mode menu) is
displayed.
Time Search (HDD, DVD): For example, for 25 minutes
into the current title, press 2, 5, 0, 0. For 1 hour and 15
minutes and 20 seconds into the title, press 1, 1, 5, 2, 0.
Time Search (Video CD): For example, for 2 minutes and
30 seconds into the current track, press 2, 3, 0.
Repeat play
ALL
Title/Chapter/Folder/Track Search: For example, for track 6,
press 6. Alternatively, you can use the ꢀ/ꢁ buttons.
There are various repeat play options, depending on the
kind of disc loaded, or if you’re using the HDD for
playback. It’s also possible to use repeat play together
with program play to repeat the tracks/chapters in the
4
Press ENTER.
2
program list (see Program play on page 67).
Tip
• You can often select what you want to watch on a
DVD disc from the disc menu. Press MENU or TOP
MENU to display the disc menu.
1
2
Select ‘Repeat’ from the Play Mode menu.
Select a repeat play mode.
• Time search doesn’t work with CDs and Super VCDs.
Play Mode
Repeat Disc
Repeat Title
Repeat Chapter
Repeat Off
Search Mode
A-B Repeat
Repeat
A-B Repeat
Program
DVD
CD
Video CD
HDD
The A-B Repeat function allows you to specify two points
(A and B) within a track or title that form a loop which is
1
played over and over.
VR mode
1
During playback, select ‘A-B Repeat’ from the
• For VR mode DVD discs, select Repeat Disc, Repeat
Title or Repeat Chapter (or Repeat Off).
Play Mode menu.
2
With ‘A (Loop Start)’ highlighted, press ENTER at
DVD-Video Video mode
HDD
the point you want the loop to start.
• For HDD, DVD-Video and Video mode DVD discs,
select Repeat Title or Repeat Chapter (or Repeat
Off).
Play Mode
A (Loop Start)
B (Loop End)
Off
Search Mode
A-B Repeat
Repeat
Program
CD
Video CD
Super VCD
• For CDs and Video CD/Super VCDs, select Repeat
Disc or Repeat Track (or Repeat Off).
After setting the loop start point, the highlight will
automatically move down to B (Loop End).
WMA/MP3
• For WMA/MP3 discs, select Repeat Disc, Repeat
Folder or Repeat Track (or Repeat Off).
Note
1.• If you switch camera angles during A-B repeat play, A-B repeat is canceled.
• You can’t use A-B Repeat with WMA/MP3 or Super VCD discs.
2.If you switch the camera angle during repeat play of a DVD-Video disc, repeat play is canceled.
66
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playback
07
3
To resume normal playback, select ‘Repeat Off’
CD or Video CD/Super VCD: Select a track to add to the
program list.
from the Repeat Play menu.
• You can also press CLEAR to cancel repeat play if no
menu OSD (such as the Play Mode menu) is
displayed.
Program
Step
01.04
02.
Track (01-10)
Track 01
Track 02
Track 03
Track 04
Track 05
Track 06
Track 07
Track 08
Total Time 0.00.00
03.
04.
05.
06.
07.
08.
Program play
DVD-Video
HDD
CD
Video CD
Super VCD WMA/MP3
This feature lets you program the play order of titles/
1
chapters /folders/tracks on a disc or the HDD.
WMA/MP3: You can add a whole folder, or a track within
a folder to the program list.
1
Select ‘Program’ from the Play Mode menu.
• To add a folder, select the folder.
2
Select ‘Input/Edit Program’ from the list of
• To add a track, first highlight the folder, then press ꢃ
and select a track from the list.
program options.
Play Mode
Program
Input/Edit Program
Start Program Play
Cancel Program Play
Erase Program List
Search Mode
A-B Repeat
Repeat
Step
01.01
02.
Folder (01-03)
01.Rock
Track(001-004)
001.Intro
Program
02.Pop
002.Escape
03.
04.
03.Dance
003.Everything You Say
004.What I Do
05.
06.
07.
08.
The Program edit screen that appears depends on the
kind of disc loaded.
On the left side is the program list, then to the right is a
list of titles (DVD, HDD), folders (WMA/MP3), or tracks
(CD, Video CD/Super VCDs). On the far right is a list of
chapters (DVD, HDD) or tracks (WMA/MP3).
After pressing ENTER to add the title/chapter/folder/
track, the step number automatically moves down one.
• To insert a step into the program list, highlight the
step number where you want to insert another step,
then select a chapter/title/folder/track as usual. After
pressing ENTER, all the subsequent steps move
down one.
3
Select a title, chapter, folder or track for the
current step in the program list.
DVD or HDD: You can add a whole title, or a chapter
within a title to the program list.
• To delete a step from the program list, highlight the
step you want to delete, then press CLEAR.
• To add a title, select the title.
• To add a chapter, first highlight the title, then press
ꢃand select a chapter from the list.
4
Repeat step 3 to build up a program list.
A program list can contain up to 24 titles/chapters/
folders/tracks.
Program
Step
01.001
02.
03.
04.
05.
06.
07.
08.
Title (01-03)
Title 01
Title 02
Chapter(001-015)
Chapter 001
Chapter 002
Chapter 003
Chapter 004
Chapter 005
Chapter 006
Chapter 007
Chapter 008
5
To play the program list, press ꢆ PLAY.
Program play remains active until you turn off program
play (see below), erase the program list (see below), eject
the disc or switch off the recorder.
Title 03
• You can use repeat play with program play. Start
playback of the program list then select Program
Repeat from the Repeat Play Mode menu (see
Repeat play on page 66).
Note
1.When playing a program list of DVD-Video chapters, chapters not included in the program list may be sometimes be played, depending on
the disc.
67
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playback
07
Tip
Displaying and switching subtitles
DVD-Video
• To save your program list and exit the program edit
screen without starting playback, press HOME
MENU or PLAY MODE.
Some DVD discs have subtitles in one or more
languages; the disc box will usually tell you which
subtitle languages are available. You can switch subtitle
• You can change the program list by selecting Input/
Edit Program from the Play Mode Program menu.
1
language during playback.
• During program play, press ꢍ to skip to the next
program step.
Check the disc packaging for details of the subtitle
options.
• Press CLEAR during playback to switch off program
play (if no menu OSD, such as the Disc Navigator, is
displayed). Press while stopped to erase the program
list.
Other Program play functions
As well as creating and editing a program list, you can
start program play, cancel program play, and erase the
program list from the Play Mode menu.
CLEAR
CLEAR
SUBTITLE
1
Press PLAY MODE and select ‘Program’ from the
list of functions on the left.
1
Press SUBTITLE repeatedly to select a subtitle
2
Select a program play function.
• Input/Edit Program – See above
option.
The current subtitle language is shown on-screen and in
the front panel display.
• Start Program Play – Starts playback of a saved
program list
• Cancel Program Play – Turns off program play, but
does not erase the program list
Subtitle: 1/2 English
• Erase Program List – Erases the program list and
turns off program play
The toucan lives in tropical forests
2
To switch off subtitles, press SUBTITLE then
CLEAR.
Note
1.• Some discs only allow you to change subtitle language from the disc menu. Press TOP MENU to access.
• To set subtitle preferences, see Subtitle Language on page 104.
68
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playback
07
Switching DVD soundtracks
Switching audio channels
DVD-Video
VR mode
HDD
CD
Video CD
Super VCD
When playing a DVD disc recorded with two or more
soundtracks (often in different languages), you can
switch the soundtrack during playback.
WMA/MP3
2
For HDD and VR mode content recorded with bilingual
audio, you can switch between left (L) channel, right (R)
channel, or both (L+R).
1
Check the disc packaging for details of the soundtrack
options.
3
When playing Video CDs and audio CDs you can switch
between stereo, just the left channel or just the right
channel.
AUDIO
Some Super VCDs have two soundtracks. With these
discs you can switch between the two soundtracks as
well as individual channels in each.
•
Press AUDIO repeatedly to select an audio
soundtrack.
AUDIO
Audio : 1/2
Dolby Digital 2/0CH
1
To display/switch the audio channel, press
AUDIO repeatedly.
The audio channel(s) currently playing are indicated on-
screen.
• The sound may drop out for a few seconds when
switching soundtracks.
VR mode
HDD
• Some discs feature both Dolby Digital and DTS
soundtracks. There is no analog audio output when
DTS is selected. To listen to the DTS soundtrack,
connect this recorder to a DTS decoder or AV amp/
receiver with built-in DTS decoder via the digital
output. See Connecting to an AV amplifier/receiver on
page 19 for connection details.
• L+R – Both channels (default)
• L – Left channel only
• R – Right channel only
CD
Video CD
WMA/MP3
• Stereo – Stereo (default)
• 1/L – Left channel only
• 2/R – Right channel only
Super VCD
• 1 Stereo – Soundtrack 1 / Stereo (default)
• 1 L – Soundtrack 1 / Left channel
• 1 R – Soundtrack 1 / Right channel
• 2 Stereo – Soundtrack 2 / Stereo
• 2 L – Soundtrack 2 / Left channel
• 2 R – Soundtrack 2 / Right channel
Note
1.• Some discs only allow you to change audio language from the disc menu. Press TOP MENU to access.
• To set audio language preferences, see Audio Language on page 103.
2.Only when HDD Recording Format is set to Video Mode Off (HDD Recording Format on page 105).
3.When playing a Bilingual recording on a VR mode disc, if you are listening to the Dolby Digital soundtrack via the digital output, you cannot
switch the audio channel. Set Dolby Digital Out to Dolby Digital ꢄ PCM (see Dolby Digital Out on page 103) or listen via the analog outputs
if you need to switch the audio channel.
69
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playback
07
Switching camera angles
DVD-Video
Some DVD-Video discs feature scenes shot from two or
more angles—check the disc box for details: it should be
marked with a
icon if it contains multi-angle scenes.
When a multi-angle scene is playing, the same icon
appears on screen to let you know that other angles are
available (this can be switched off if you prefer—see
Angle Indicator on page 106).
ANGLE
MENU
TOP MENU
•
To switch the camera angle, press ANGLE.
• The angle number is displayed on-screen.
• If the disc was paused, playback starts again with the
new angle.
• Repeat play is canceled if you change the angle while
repeat playback is active.
• You can also change the angle from some DVD-Video
disc menus. Press TOP MENU or MENU to access.
70
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Copying and back-up
08
CChaoptpery8 ing and back-up
Copyright
Recording equipment should be used only for lawful
copying and you are advised to check carefully what is
lawful copying in the country in which you are making a
copy. Copying of copyright material such as films or
music is unlawful unless permitted by a legal exception
or consented to by the rightowners.
Introduction
Use the copying features of this recorder to:
• Back up important recordings stored on the HDD to
a DVD.
• Make a DVD copy of a recording on the HDD to play
in another player.
• Transfer video from a DVD to the HDD for editing.
• Transfer edited video from the HDD to DVD.
One Touch Copy
The simplest way to copy a title is to use the One Touch
Copy feature. This copies the currently playing HDD title
to DVD, or DVD title to the HDD. See One Touch Copy on
page 71 for detailed instructions.
* See also Copyright above.
The One Touch Copy feature copies the currently playing
or selected (in the Disc Navigator) HDD title to DVD, or
DVD title to HDD. The whole title is copied, regardless of
where in the title you start the copy.
For more sophisticated copying tasks you can build a
Copy List of titles to copy, and edit titles so that you only
copy the bits you want. See Using Copy Lists on page 72
for detailed instructions.
HDD to DVD copies are made in the same recording
mode. When copying DVD to HDD, the copy is made in
whatever recording mode is currently set.
Where possible, the recorder will copy your recordings at
high-speed. Depending on the recording mode, the kind
of disc loaded and various other factors, copying can be
as fast as one minute per hour of video. See Minimum
copying times on page 111 for more on copying times.
Make sure that a recordable DVD-R/RW disc is loaded
when trying to copy from the HDD.
ONE TOUCH
COPY
If you want to save disc space you can copy video at a
lower recording quality (for example, an XP recording on
the HDD copied to SP on a DVD). Copying in this way is
always done in real-time.
1
If you’re copying from DVD to the HDD, use the
When real-time copying from the HDD to a Video mode
DVD, the chapter markers in the original material are not
copied. Chapter markers are put into the copy at
intervals, according to the Auto Chapter (Video) setting
(see also Auto Chapter (Video) on page 105).
REC MODE button to select a recording mode.
Note that selecting a recording mode higher than the title
playing will not result in a better quality recording.
2
During playback, press ONE TOUCH COPY to
copy the current title.
The front panel display indicates that the title is being
copied.
Restrictions on copying
Some video material is copy-once protected. This means
that it can be recorded to HDD, but it can’t then be freely
copied again. If you want to transfer copy-once protected
material from HDD to DVD, you’ll need to use a VR mode
disc compatible with CPRM Ver. 1.1 or higher (see CPRM
on page 50 for more on this). Only one instance of a copy-
once protected title can be added to the Copy List, and
after it’s been copied, the title is erased from the HDD (it
is therefore not possible to copy a locked title that is copy-
once protected).
• High-speed copying is used when copying from the
HDD to DVD. Playback continues while copying.
• Real-time copying is used when copying from DVD to
the HDD. Playback restarts from the beginning of the
title.
You can identify copy-once protected material during
playback by displaying disc information on-screen. If the
current title is copy-once protected, an exclamation mark
( ! ) is shown (see Play display 2 on page 37).
71
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Copying and back-up
08
Canceling One Touch Copy
You can cancel a One Touch Copy once it’s started.
Using Copy Lists
* See also Copyright on page 71.
•
Press and hold ONE TOUCH COPY for more than
a second.
At its simplest, a Copy List is just a list of HDD or DVD
titles that you want to copy. When copying HDD titles to
DVD, you can, however, edit the titles in your copy list,
erasing chapters you don’t need, or re-naming titles, for
example. Edits you make to titles in the Copy List do not
affect the actual video content; only the ‘virtual’ content
of the Copy List. So you can freely erase and modify
anything in your Copy List safe in the knowledge that the
actual content is not being altered.
Copying is canceled and the video already copied is
erased.
• If you cancel a HDD to DVD-R copy, the space
available for recording does not return to the pre-
copy figure.
Notes on copying using One Touch Copy
Copying to DVD
Copying from HDD to DVD
• Title name, chapter markers, as well as thumbnail
picture markers for the Disc Navigator, are also
copied. However, if you copy to a Video mode DVD-R/
RW, only the first 40 characters of a name are copied.
Important
• The recorder can only store one Copy List at a time.
• The chapter markers in the copy may not be in exactly
the same positions as the original when recording on
to a Video mode disc.
• The Copy List is erased if the Input Line System
setting is changed (see Additional information about
the TV system settings on page 107).
• You can’t use the One Touch Copy function to copy a
title if any part of the title is copy-once protected.
• Resetting the recorder to its factory settings (see
Resetting the recorder on page 109) will erase the
Copy List.
• A title that contains mixed aspect ratios can’t be
copied to a Video mode disc. Use a VR mode disc for
this type of material.
1
• Low resolution (SEP through LP modes ) widescreen
material can’t be copied to a Video mode disc. Use a
VR mode disc for this type of material.
ENTER
HOME
MENU
RETURN
• When HDD Recording Format is set to Video Mode
Off, titles recorded in LP/MN9–15 modes cannot be
high-speed copied to a Video mode DVD. Please use
a VR mode disc.
• Recordings of bilingual broadcasts cannot be high-
speed copied to a Video mode DVD. Please use a VR
mode disc.
PREV
NEXT
• XP+ titles cannot be copied to DVD at high-speed.
Copying to the HDD
1
Press HOME MENU and select ‘Copy’.
• The maximum title length for copying is 12 hours.
• Title name and chapter markers are also copied,
except when copying from a finalized Video mode
disc.
Disc Navigator
TV GUIDE
Disc Setup
Initial Setup
Video/Audio Adjust
Copy
• Thumbnail picture markers and chapter markers for
the Disc Navigator are copied, but their position in
the copy may be slightly changed from the original.
Timer Recording
Play Mode
Photo Viewer
Jukebox
• If some part of the title being copied is copy-
protected, copying will start, but the copy-protected
portions will not be copied.
Note
1.In manual recording mode these equate to MN1–15 (Video Mode Off) or MN1–11 (Video Mode On).
72
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Copying and back-up
08
2
Select ‘HDD ꢄ DVD’.
5
Use the ꢀ/ꢁ buttons to highlight titles you want
If this is the first time to create a Copy List, skip to step 4
below.
to copy, pressing ENTER after each one to add it to
the Copy List.
10 Title
Copy
Select Title
Copy
HDD DVD (Video mode)
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
MON 29/11 19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP
MON 29/11 19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP
MON 29/11 19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP
MON 29/11 19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP
MON 29/11 19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP
MON 29/11 19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP
MON 29/11 19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP
MON 29/11 19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP
Return
Next
HDD DVD
DVD/CD HDD
Disc Back-up
DV Record
Recent first
All Genres
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP
19:00
2h00m(1.0G)
Copy List Total
Current DVD Remain
1.2G
1.2G
3
If there is already a Copy List stored in the
recorder, choose whether to ‘Create New Copy List’
or ‘Use Existing Copy List’.
If you select Use Existing Copy List, skip to step 8 below.
Titles you’ve added to the Copy List are highlighted in
pink.
There are some restrictions on titles that can be added to
the Copy List if you are copying to a Video mode DVD:
Copy
• When adding titles that contain copy-once protected
material, the copy-once parts will not be added.
Use Existng Copy List
Create New Cppy List
• When adding titles that contain material of more
than one aspect ratio (screen size), each part with a
different aspect ratio will be added as a separate title
if high-speed copying is possible.
• Selecting Create New Copy List will erase any Copy
List already stored in the recorder.
1
Depending on the title , high-speed copying may not be
possible to a Video mode disc.
4
Select VR mode or Video mode for the copy.
6
Press ꢃ to display the command menu panel.
For certain kinds of material you must use VR mode; for
greater compatibility with other players, use Video mode.
The Command Menu panel
10 Title
Copy
Select Title
HDD DVD (Video mode)
Copy
HDD DVD
Select Recording Format
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
MON 29/11 19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP
MON 29/11 19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP
MON 29/11 19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP
MON 29/11 19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP
MON 29/11 19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP
MON 29/11 19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP
MON 29/11 19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP
MON 29/11 19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP
Return
Please select the recording format for the disc.
Recent first
All Genres
Copying of bilingual broadcasts and
copy-once protected material
is possible.
VR Mode
Next
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP
Video Mode
High compatibility mode. Must be final-
ized for playback on other equipment.
19:00
2h00m(1.0G)
Copy List Total
Current DVD Remain
1.2G
1.2G
Note
1.• Widescreen titles recorded at low resolution (SEP through LP/MN1–15 (Video Mode Off) or MN1–11 (Video Mode On).
• LP/MN9–15 recordings when HDD Recording Mode is set to Video Mode Off.
• Bilingual recordings.
• Combined titles that were originally recorded using different recording modes.
• XP+ titles.
73
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Copying and back-up
08
7
Select ‘Next’ to move on to the Title Edit screen.
• Bilingual – Set how bilingual audio should be copied
when copying from HDD to Video mode DVD (see
page 79).
3
Title
Copy
Edit Title
HDD DVD (Video mode)
• Cancel – Exit the Copy List screen without saving any
changes.
1
2
3
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP
Return
Next
Repeat this step for as many titles you have that need
editing.
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP
2h00m(1.0G)
9
Press ꢃ to display the command menu panel.
10 Select ‘Next’ to proceed to the Start Copy screen.
Copy List Total
Current DVD Remain
1.2G
1.2G
3
Title
Copy
Edit Title
HDD DVD (Video mode)
8
To edit a title, highlight it using the ꢀ/ꢁ
1
2
3
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP
buttons, then press ENTER.
Return
3
Title
Copy
Edit Title
HDD DVD (Video mode)
Next
1
2
3
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr
Erase
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr
Title Name
Return
Next
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP
2h00m(1.0G)
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr
Erase Section
Move
Preview
Copy List Total
1.2G
1.2G
Current DVD Remain
Cancel
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP
• Select Recording Mode if you want to change the
2h00m(1.0G)
recording quality (see Recording Mode on page 78).
Copy List Total
Current DVD Remain
1.2G
1.2G
• Select Input Disc Name if you want to change the
disc name. Input a name of up to 64 characters for a
VR mode disc or 40 characters for a Video mode disc.
(The input method is similar to that of naming titles;
see Title Name on page 75.)
A menu of editing commands appears:
• Erase – Erase individual titles from the Copy List (see
page 75).
• Title Name – Name or rename a title in the Copy List
(see page 75).
• Select Finalize if you want to automatically finalize a
1
Video mode DVD after copying. Select a title menu
• Erase Section – Erase part of a title (see page 76).
style from the following screen.
• Move – Change the order of titles in the Copy List
(see page 76).
Copy
HDD DVD (Video Mode)
DVD-RW
Start Copy
• Preview – Check the content of a title in the Copy List
HDD
Return
(see page 77).
Change Rec. Mode
Input Disc Name
Finalized
Copy Time 0h00m
• Divide – Divide a title in the Copy List into two (see
page 77).
Recording Mode
Disc Name
SP
Off
Finalized
Start Copy
• Combine – Combine two titles in the Copy List into
Copy List Total
Current DVD Remain
1.2G
1.2G
one (see page 77).
• Chapter Edit – Edit chapters within a Copy List title
(see page 77):
11 Select ‘Start Copy’ to start copying.
• Divide – Divide a chapter into two.
• Erase/Move – Erase a chapter/Change the
chapter order.
• Combine – Combine two chapters into one.
• Set Thumbnail – Set the thumbnail frame for a title
(see page 78).
• Recording Mode – Set the picture quality of the copy
(see page 78).
Note
1.If a timer recording is scheduled to start during copying, the disc will not be finalized.
74
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Copying and back-up
08
8
9
Press ꢃ to display the command menu panel.
Copying from DVD to HDD
Important
Select ‘Next’ to proceed to the Start Copy screen.
• Select Recording Mode if you want to change the
recording quality (see Recording Mode on page 78).
• The DVD to HDD Copy screen isn’t accessible when
a finalized Video mode disc is loaded. However, you
can still use the One Touch Copy function (See One
Touch Copy on page 71).
10 Select ‘Start Copy’ to start copying.
Erase
• The recorder can only store one Copy List at a time.
Use this command to erase individual titles from the
Copy List.
• The Copy List will be erased if:
– any of the titles on the DVD disc are erased or
edited.
– the disc tray is opened.
– playback is switched between Play List and
Original.
– the DVD disc is re-initialized or finalized.
– the recorder is reset to its factory settings (see
Resetting the recorder on page 109).
1
2
3
Highlight the title you want to erase.
Select ‘Erase’ from the command menu panel.
Select ‘Yes’ to confirm or ‘No’ to cancel, then
press ENTER.
Erase ?
!
• It may not be possible to copy from a DVD disc that
was recorded on a different DVD recorder or a PC.
Yes
No
1
2
3
Press HOME MENU and select ‘Copy’.
Select ‘DVD/CD ꢄ HDD’.
Tip
• You can erase a title quickly by pressing CLEAR when
the title is highlighted. Confirm the edit by pressing
ENTER.
If there is already a Copy List stored in the
recorder, choose whether to ‘Create New Copy List’
or ‘Use Existing Copy List’.
• Selecting Create New Copy List will erase any Copy
List already stored in the recorder.
Title Name
Use this command to name or rename titles in the Copy
List (the names of the original titles remain unchanged).
When copying to a Video mode disc, the name length is
limited to 40 characters; for a VR mode disc, the limit is
64 characters.
4
Use the ꢀ/ꢁ buttons to highlight titles you want
to copy, pressing ENTER after each one to add it to
the Copy List.
Titles you’ve added to the Copy List are highlighted in
pink.
1
Highlight the title you want to name (or
5
6
7
Press ꢃ to display the command menu panel.
Select ‘Next’ to move on to the Title Edit screen.
To edit a title, highlight it using the ꢀ/ꢁ
rename).
2
Select ‘Title Name’ from the command menu
panel.
buttons, then press ENTER.
3
Input a name for the selected title.
A menu appears of Copy List editing commands:
• Erase – Erase individual titles from the Copy List (see
Input Title Name
page 75).
12:30 Wed 4/11 Pr 5 LP
A B C D E F G H I
J
K L M .
,
)
I
?
:
!
;
CAPS
small
• Move – Change the order of titles in the Copy List
(see page 76).
N
O
P
A
O
2
Q
A
O
3
R S T U V WX Y Z
(
I
ç
A A
A
O
4
A
O
5
[
§
·
Æ
O
6
E
U
8
E
U
9
÷
<<
E
U
<
x
E
U
=
I
I
#
%
D
0
N
1
+
ø
7
]
Y
>
{
ß $
_
&
~
}
• Preview – Check the content of a title in the Copy List
(see page 77).
–
/
@
¥
ˆ
±
|
¡
_
a
c
£
\
µ
¨
© –
¬
–
®
˚
`
< < 14
/
o
1
1
3
2
3
¿
¸
¶
–
/2
/4
´
OK
Clear
Space
• Cancel – Exit the Copy List screen without saving any
changes.
Repeat this step for as many titles you have that need
editing.
• Use the ꢀ/ꢁ/ꢂ/ꢃ and ENTER to select characters.
• A name generated automatically by the recorder will
already be in the name input section of the screen.
Use the ꢉ/ꢊ buttons to change the cursor
position.
75
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Copying and back-up
08
• Select CAPS or small to change to upper or lower-
case, or use the CASE SELECTION buttons (ꢌ/
ꢍ).
4
Highlight ‘From’ then use the playback controls
(ꢆ, ꢋ, ꢉ, ꢊ, etc.) to find the start of the section
to erase, then press ENTER.
The bar at the bottom of the screen indicates the current
play position in the title. After pressing ENTER, a marker
shows the start of the section.
• You can also use the CLEAR button to delete
characters directly (press and hold for two seconds
to delete the whole name). For other remote control
key shortcuts, see Using the remote key shortcuts to
input a name on page 84.
Erase Section (HDD Copy)
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP
• For discs formatted on a different DVD recorder, you
will see only a limited character set.
0h01m
Rec. time
4
Highlight ‘OK’ then press ENTER to enter the
5-1
00.00.09.15
name and return to the Copy List.
ꢋ Play Pause
From
• To return to the main Copy List screen without saving
To
changes to the title name, press RETURN.
Exit
5
Highlight ‘To’ then, in the same way, find the
Erase Section
end of the section to erase, then press ENTER.
After pressing ENTER, another marker indicates the end
of the section, with the section itself marked in red.
Using this command you can delete a part of a Copy List
title, ideal for cutting out the commercial breaks in a
recording made from the TV.
6
Select ‘Yes’ to confirm, or ‘No’ to cancel, then
1
Highlight the title containing the section you
press ENTER.
want to erase.
Erase ?
2
Select ‘Erase Section’ from the command menu
!
panel.
Yes
No
The Erase Section screen appears from which you can
mark the start and end points of the section to erase.
In the thumbnail viewer you can see a few seconds of
video either side of the marked section to see how the
edit will look.
3
Select the type of edit.
DVD RECORDER
!
Please select the type of editing.
Video Mode Compatible Editing is
recommended for compatibility with
high-speed copying.
Move
Use this command to change the order of titles in the
Copy List.
Video Mode Compatible Editing
Frame Accurate Editing
1
Highlight the title you want to move and press
ENTER.
2
3
Select ‘Move’ from the command menu panel.
Move the insert bar to the new position for the
• Video Mode Compatible Editing – Edit points
cannot be set with absolute precision, but high-
speed copying to Video mode DVD will be possible.
title and press ENTER.
• Frame Accurate Editing – Exact edit points are
preserved, but high-speed copying to Video mode
DVD will not be possible.
Title to move
Insertion position
3
Title
Copy
Edit Title
HDD DVD (Video mode)
• For more information about these options, see
Editing accuracy on page 82
1
2
3
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP
Return
Next
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP
2h00m(1.0G)
Copy List Total
Current DVD Remain
1.2G
1.2G
76
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Copying and back-up
08
Preview
Combine
Use this command to check what’s in a title.
Use this command to make a single title from two titles
in the Copy List. The second title selected will be
appended to the first.
1
Highlight the title you want to preview.
2
Select ‘Preview’ from the command menu panel.
1
Highlight the title you want to combine with
The selected title starts to play. Use any of the usual
playback controls to scan, skip, play in slow-motion, etc.
another, then press ENTER.
This title will not move. The next title you select will be
appended to this one.
3
To get back to the Copy List, press RETURN.
2
3
Select ‘Combine’ from the command menu panel.
Select the title you want to append to the first,
Divide
Use this command to make two titles from a title already
in the Copy List.
then press ENTER.
This title will effectively move to be added to the end of the
first title. In the example below, title 3 will be appended to
title 1.
1
2
3
Highlight the title you want to divide.
Select ‘Divide’ from the command menu panel.
Select the type of edit.
This title will not move
This title will be appended
3
Title
Copy
Edit Title
HDD DVD (Video mode)
DVD RECORDER
!
1
2
3
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP
Please select the type of editing.
Video Mode Compatible Editing is
recommended for compatibility with
high-speed copying.
Return
Next
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP
2h00m(1.0G)
Video Mode Compatible Editing
Frame Accurate Editing
Copy List Total
Current DVD Remain
1.2G
1.2G
• Video Mode Compatible Editing – Edit points
cannot be set with absolute precision, but high-
speed copying to Video mode DVD will be possible.
4
Select ‘Yes’ to confirm or ‘No’ to cancel, then
press ENTER.
• Frame Accurate Editing – Exact edit points are
preserved, but high-speed copying to Video mode
DVD will not be possible.
OK to combine titles
1 and 3 ?
!
Yes
No
• For more information about these options, see
Editing accuracy on page 82
Chapter Edit
4
Use the playback controls (ꢆ, ꢋ, ꢉ, ꢊ, etc.) to
The Chapter Edit option gives you access to several
commands that you can use to edit chapters within a
Copy List title.
find the place you want to divide the title.
Divide Title (HDD Copy)
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP
1
Highlight the title that contains the chapters you
0h01m
Rec. time
want to edit.
2
Select ‘Chapter Edit’ from the command menu
5–1
00.00.09.15
panel.
ꢋ
Play Pause
Divide
Cancel
3
Select the type of editing.
DVD RECORDER
!
5
Press ENTER to divide the title at the current
Please select the type of editing.
Video Mode Compatible Editing is
recommended for compatibility with
high-speed copying.
playback position.
Video Mode Compatible Editing
Frame Accurate Editing
77
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Copying and back-up
08
• Video Mode Compatible Editing – Edit points
cannot be set with absolute precision, but high-
speed copying to Video mode DVD will be possible.
Set Thumbnail
You can change the thumbnail picture that appears in
the four-title display of the Disc Navigator for a title to any
frame that appears in that title.
• Frame Accurate Editing – Exact edit points are
preserved, but high-speed copying to Video mode
DVD will not be possible.
1
Highlight the title you want to change the
thumbnail picture for.
• For more information about these options, see
Editing accuracy on page 82
2
Select ‘Set Thumbnail’ from the command menu
panel.
4
Select the command you want:
The thumbnail setting screen appears from which you
can find the frame you want.
• Divide – Divide a chapter into two or more parts: Use
the playback controls (ꢆ, ꢋ, ꢉ, ꢊ, etc.) to find the
point at which you want to divide the chapter, then
press ENTER.
3
Use the playback controls (ꢆ, ꢋ, ꢉ, ꢊ, etc.) to
find a suitable frame, then press ENTER to set.
You can also use the chapter and time search features
(press PLAY MODE), and the CM SKIP buttons.
Edit Chapter (HDD Copy)
18:00 Mon 29/11 Pr
1
XP
Rec. time
Chapters
1h00m
10
Set Thumbnail (HDD Copy)
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP
1–1
0.00.00
ꢆ
Play
Exit
Divide
0h01m
Rec. time
Erase/Move
Combine
5-1
00.00.09.15
You can keep dividing the chapter as many times as
you wish (up to 99 per title).
ꢋ Play Pause
OK
• Erase/Move – Erase or move chapters: Select the
chapter you want to erase/move and press ENTER.
Select whether you want to erase or move the
chapter.
Exit
4
Select ‘Exit’ to return to the Copy List screen.
Move command only: Select the destination for the
chapter, and press ENTER.
Recording Mode
Select ‘Recording Mode’ from the command
1
Edit Chapter (HDD Copy)
menu panel.
19:00 Mon 29/11 P
Rec. time 1h00m
Erase
Move
Chapter
0h01m
Cancel
2
Use the ꢀ/ꢁ buttons to select a recording mode
001
002
003
004
005
for the copy.
1
Exit
Divide
• High-Speed Copy – The Copy List is copied at the
Erase/Move
Combine
same recording quality as the original.
2
• XP, SP, LP, EP, SLP, SEP, MN – The Copy List is
• Combine – Combine two adjacent chapters into one:
Highlight the bar divider between two adjacent
chapters and press ENTER.
copied at the specified recording quality in real-time.
(Note that if you copy at a higher quality setting than
the original, the copy will not be better quality than
the original.)
Edit Chapter (HDD Copy)
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr
Rec. time
2
SP
If you select MN above, you can also change the level
setting (MN1–MN32, LPCM or XP+ ) from the
1h00m
3
001
002
003
004
005
Recording Quality box that appears.
Exit
Divide
Erase/Move
Combine
2,4
• Optimized – The recording quality is automatically
Erase/Move
adjusted so that the Copy List fits on to the space
available on the disc. Copying is carried out in real-
time.
5
Select ‘Exit’ to get back to the main Copy List
screen.
Note
1.When copying to a Video mode DVD, the chapter markers in the copy may not be in exactly the same position as the original.
2.When the copy mode is set to something other than High-Speed Copy for copying to a Video mode DVD, the chapter markers of the original
are not copied. Chapter markers are put into the copy at regular intervals, according to the Auto Chapter setting (see also Auto Chapter (Video)
on page 105).
3.XP+ mode available only when copying to HDD.
4.Optimized mode only available when copying to DVD.
78
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Copying and back-up
08
When you change the recording mode setting, you can
see how much disc space it will require. If this is more
than is available, it shows up in red and you won’t be able
to start copying. In this case, either change the recording
quality, or press RETURN to go back to the Copy List
screen and erase one or more titles from the Copy List.
3
Press ꢄ OPEN/CLOSE to open the disc tray and
load the disc you want to make a back-up of, then
close the disc tray.
You can only make back-up copies of finalized Video
mode discs.
Disc Back-up
3
Press ENTER.
No Disc.
Please load a disc to be backed-up.
Bilingual
Cancel
Start
1
Select the title containing the audio you want to
change.
4
Select ‘Start’.
2
3
Select ‘Bilingual’ from the command menu panel.
Use the ꢀ/ꢁ buttons to select a bilingual audio
Disc Back-up
Read from disc and save to HDD.
Start reading?
option.
4
Press ENTER.
Cancel
Start
• To see the progress of the back-up, press DISPLAY.
• You can cancel the back-up process by pressing ONE
TOUCH COPY for more than one second.
Using disc back-up
* See also Copyright on page 71.
This feature offers a simple way to make a back-up copy
of a finalized Video mode disc. The data is copied first to
the hard disk drive , then on to another recordable DVD
5
When the data has been copied, press ꢄ OPEN/
CLOSE to open the disc tray. Take out the disc and
load a blank* recordable DVD.
* If you’re using a DVD-RW, the disc doesn’t have to be
blank, although the previous contents of the disc will be
erased in the back-up process.
1
disc.
1
Press HOME MENU, select ‘Copy’, then ‘Disc Back-
up’.
Disc Back-up
2
Select a back-up option.
Disc content saved to Hard Disk Drive.
Please eject the disc and load a
recordable disc
Disc Back-up
Cancel
Start
Start new disc back-up
Resume writing date
Erase back-up date
You can use a DVD-R Ver. 2.0 or 2.1 disc, or DVD-RW Ver.
1.1 or Ver. 1.2 disc for the back-up.
• If you back-up a DVD-R disc to DVD-RW, you cannot
undo the finalization later.
There are three back-up options:
• Actual recordable capacity of discs vary so there may
be cases where the contents of the disc you’re
backing-up will not fit on to a particular blank disc. If
this happens, please try another brand of disc.
• Start new disc back-up – Start making a back-up of
a disc.
• Resume writing data – Record the back-up data
already on the HDD to a recordable DVD.
• Erase back-up data – Erase the back-up data on the
HDD.
Note
1.It is not possible to play this material directly from the HDD.
79
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Copying and back-up
08
6
Select ‘Start’ to start writing the backed-up data
to the blank disc.
Disc Back-up
Write back-up data from Hard Disk Drive.
The disc contents will be overwritten.
OK to start?
Cancel
Start
• To see the progress of the back-up, press DISPLAY.
• You can cancel the back-up process by pressing ONE
TOUCH COPY for more than one second. However,
this will make the disc unusable (although if you are
using a DVD-RW disc you can re-initialize it in order
to make it usable again—see Initializing a recordable
DVD disc on page 60.)
7
After the recorder has finished recording the
back-up disc, you can select whether to make
another back-up of the same data or exit.
Disc Back-up
Disc back-up finished.
To make another back-up copy, please load
a recordable disc.
Cancel
Start
• Select Start to make another back-up copy or Cancel
to finish. If you want to make another back-up copy,
return to step 6 above.
8
If you don’t need to keep the back-up data on
the HDD, you can delete it now.
Select Yes to delete the data from the HDD; select No to
keep it (you can delete it later if you want to).
Disc Back-up
The backed-up data is still on the HDD.
Erasing it will increase the free space
available. OK to Erase?
No
Yes
• If you decide to leave the back-up data on the HDD,
you can make back-up copies to recordable DVD
discs anytime from the Disc Back-up menu.
80
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Editing
09
CEhdapitetri9ng
1
Press HDD or DVD to select the hard disk drive or
the DVD.
The Disc Navigator screen
The Disc Navigator screen is where you can edit video
content on unfinalized Video mode and VR mode DVD
2
Press DISC NAVIGATOR to display the Disc
Navigator screen.
Playback will automatically stop when you do this.
1
discs , as well as video content on the internal hard disk
drive.
View options panel
Title list
Disc Navigator (HDD)
10
10Titles
Important
23:00 FRI 3/12
23:00 Fri 3/12 Pr
Title list style
Title list order
4
SP
Selected
title
2h00m(1.0G)
4
Titles
• Titles that have been recorded with a Line Input
setting different to the current setting of the recorder
are shown in the Disc Navigator with a blank
thumbnail image. See also Additional information
about the TV system settings on page 107.
9
8
7
20:00 FRI 3/12
20:00
Fri 3/12 Pr
9
SP
Recent First
All Genres
2h00m(1.0G)
22:00 THU 2/12
Genre
selection
22:00
Thu 2/12 Pr
7
SP
1h00m(1.0G)
19:00 MON 29/11
HDD
SP
19:00
Mon 29/11 Pr
2
SP
1h00m(1.0G)
Remain
30h30m
Available
recording time
• During recording, if you display the Disc Navigator
Title thumbnail Title information Command
menu panel
for the HDD, some of the titles may appear with a
mark. These titles were recorded with a Line Input
setting different to the current setting of the recorder.
During recording, these titles cannot be played.
• You can also access the Disc Navigator from the
Home Menu (press HOME MENU, select Disc
Navigator then press ENTER).
• From the title list, press ꢃ to display the command
menu panel. Use the ꢀ/ꢁ and ENTER buttons to
navigate the menus.
• When in the title list, use the PREV (ꢌ) and NEXT
(ꢍ) buttons to display the previous/next page if
there are more titles than can be displayed.
HDD
DVD
• Press DISPLAY to change the title information
displayed in the title list.
• If you are editing a VR mode disc you can display the
Play List by selecting Play List from the view options
panel (press ꢂ, then select Play List from the view
options, then Play List).
CLEAR
CLEAR
DISC NAVIGATOR
Disc Navigator (DVD)
10Titles
ENTER
23:00 FRI 3/12
Style
23:00 Fri 3/12 Pr
4
SP
4
Titles
HOME
MENU
2h00m(1.0G)
RETURN
20:00 FRI 3/12
PlayList
20:00 Fri 3/12 Pr
9
SP
Original
2h00m(1.0G)
DISPLAY
• You can switch between the HDD and the DVD Disc
Navigator screens using the HDD and DVD buttons
(front panel or remote).
PLAY
PREV
NEXT
Titles on the HDD marked with a
icon are timer
recordings set to Auto Replace Recording (see Editing a
scheduled recording on page 43).
Titles on the HDD marked with a
icon are recently
recorded titles that haven’t yet been played.
3
To exit the Disc Navigator, press HOME MENU.
Note
1.It isn’t possible to edit video on DVD-RAM discs using this recorder.
81
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Editing
09
Command menu panel options
The table below shows which commands you can use with which video type.
VR mode
(Original)
VR mode
(Play List)
HDD
Video mode
ì
ì
ì
ì
ì
ì
Create (page 83)
ì
ì
ì
ì
ì
ì
ì
ì
ì
ì
ì
ì
ì
Play (page 83)
Erase (page 83)
Edit > Title Name (page 83)
Edit > Set Thumbnail (page 84)
Edit > Erase Section (page 85)
ì
ì
ì
ì
ì
ì
ì
Edit > Divide (page 85)
Edit > Chapter Edit (page 86)
Edit > Set Genre (page 87)
Edit > Lock (page 87)
ì
ì
ì
ì
ì
Edit > Move (page 87)
Edit > Combine (page 88)
Genre Name (page 88)
Multi Mode (page 88)
Undo (page 89)
ì
ì
ì
ì
ì
Editing accuracy
HDD genres
Some editing (and Copy List) commands ask you
whether you want to keep Video mode compatibility or
frame accuracy (Video mode compatible editing, or Frame
accurate editing).
The large capacity of the HDD means that there may be
many hours of video in the recorder. To help you organize
your HDD video content you can assign different genres
to titles. There are nine genres in total, including five
user-definable ones that you can name as you like.
Frame accurate editing is very precise. The edit point is
accurate to the exact frame you choose. However, this
accuracy is not preserved in any copy you make if you use
the high-speed copy function to make a Video mode DVD.
Video mode compatible editing is less precise. The edit
point you choose will only be accurate to within 0.5–1
second. On the other hand, these edit points will be
preserved if you use high-speed copy to make a Video
mode DVD.
82
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Editing
09
Create
Erase
VR mode
HDD
Video mode VR mode
Play List only
Use this function to create a Play List and add titles to it.
Use this function to erase unwanted titles.
Before you can use this command, make sure that the
Play List is switched on in the view options panel on the
left.
When you erase titles from the HDD or Original titles
from a VR mode DVD-RW, the available recording space
increases accordingly. Erasing a title from a Video mode
DVD-RW disc increases the available recording time only
if it is the last title on the disc.
1
Select ‘Create’ from the command menu panel.
Erasing Play List titles, or titles from a DVD-R, VR mode
or Video mode, will not result in any more free space on
the disc.
Disc Navigator (DVD)
10Titles
Play
No title
Erase
Edit
4
Titles
1
2
3
Highlight the title you want to erase.
Play List
Make Playlist
Select ‘Erase’ from the command menu panel.
Undo
Select ‘Yes’ to confirm or ‘No’ to cancel, then
DVD
VR Mode
Remain
0h30m
press ENTER.
2
Select a title to add to the Play List.
Tip
Use the ꢀ/ꢁ buttons to highlight an Original title then
press ENTER to add it to the Play List.
• You can erase a title quickly by pressing CLEAR when
the title is highlighted. Confirm the edit by pressing
ENTER.
3
When you’ve added all the titles you want, select
‘Cancel’ from the command menu panel to get back
to the Disc Navigator screen.
Title Name
HDD
Video mode VR mode
Play
You can give titles new names of up to 64 characters long
for VR mode and HDD recordings, and up to 40
characters for Video mode recordings.
HDD
Video mode VR mode
Use this function to start playback of a title.
1
Highlight the title you want to play.
1
Highlight the title you want to name (or
rename).
2
Select ‘Play’ from the command menu panel.
Playback of the title you selected starts.
2
Select ‘Edit’ > ‘Title Name’ from the command
menu panel.
Disc Navigator (HDD)
10Titles
10
23:00 FRI 3/12
Disc Navigator (HDD)
10
10Titles
Play
SP
23:00 Fri 3/12 Pr
4
Erase
23:00 FRI 3/12
2
4
Titles
Title name
23:00 Fri 3/12 Pr
4
Edit
9
8
7
20:00 FRI 3/12
Set Thumbnail
4
Titles
20:00 Fri 3/12 Pr
9
SP
Erase Section
9
8
7
20:00 FRI 3/12
Recent First
All Genres
Divide
20:00 Fri 3/12 Pr
22:00 THU 2/12
22:00 Thu 2/12 Pr
Chapter Edit
Genre Name
S
Recent First
All Genres
Set Genre
7
22:00 THU 2/12
22:00 Thu 2/12 Pr
Multi-Mode
Lock
19:00 MON 29/11
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr
Cancel
HDD
SP
Remain
30h30m
2
SP
19:00 MON 29/11
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr
1h00m(1.0G)
HDD
SP
2
SP
1h00m(1.0G)
Remain
30h30m
83
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Editing
09
3
Input a name for the selected title.
Key
1
Characters
Key
6
Characters
Input Title Name
12:30 Wed 4/01 Pr 1 SP
. , ’ ? ! – & 1
m n o 6 ö ô ò ó ø ñ
A B C D E F G H I
J
K L M .
,
)
I
?
:
!
;
CAPS
small
N
O
P
A
O
2
Q
A
O
3
R S T U V WX Y Z
(
I
a b c 2 ä à á â ã
æ ç
p q r s 7 $
2
7
ç
A A
A
O
4
A
O
5
[
§
·
Æ
O
6
E
U
8
E
U
9
÷
<<
E
U
<
x
E
U
=
I
I
#
%
D
0
N
1
+
ø
7
]
Y
>
{
ß $
*1
ÿ/ß
_
&
~
}
–
/
@
¥
ˆ
±
|
¡
_
a
c
£
\
µ
¨
¸
© –
¬
–
®
˚
`
< < 14
/
o
–
1
3
d e f 3 è é ë ê
g h i 4 î ï ì í ¡
j k l 5 £
t u v 8 ü ù û ú
w x y z 9
2
3
1
3
4
8
9
¿
¶
/
2
/
4
´
OK
Clear
Space
0
5
0
• Use the ꢀ/ꢁ/ꢂ/ꢃ and ENTER to select characters.
ꢉ
[cursor back]
[change case]
ꢊ
[cursor forward]
• A name generated automatically by the recorder will
already be in the name input section of the screen.
Use the ꢉ/ꢊ buttons to change the cursor
position.
ꢌ/
ꢍ
CLEAR [clear character]
ꢋ
<space>
ꢅ
[finish name input]
• Select CAPS or small to change to upper or lower-
case, or use the CASE SELECTION buttons (ꢌ/
ꢍ).
~
+
( ) _ / : ; ” ` ^ @ # ∗ % ¥ | + =
{ } [ ] < >
• You can also use the CLEAR button to delete
characters directly (press and hold for two seconds
to delete the whole name). For other remote control
key shortcuts, see Using the remote key shortcuts to
input a name below.
*1
lower-case: ÿ; upper-case: ß
Set Thumbnail
HDD
Video mode VR mode
• For discs formatted on a different DVD recorder, you
will see only a limited character set.
You can change the thumbnail picture that appears in
the Disc Navigator for a title to any frame that appears in
that title.
4
Highlight ‘OK’ then press ENTER to enter the
name and return to the main Disc Navigator screen.
• To return to the main Disc Navigator screen without
saving changes to the title name, press RETURN.
1
Highlight the title you want to change the
thumbnail picture for.
2
Select ‘Edit’ > ‘Set Thumbnail’ from the command
Using the remote key shortcuts to input a name
The table below shows the remote control key shortcuts
that you can use to input characters in the name input
screen. Pressing a button repeatedly cycles through the
characters shown.
menu panel.
The thumbnail setting screen appears from which you
can find the frame you want.
Disc Navigator (HDD)
10Titles
If you want to enter two characters in succession that are
both on the same button (for example a P and an R),
press ꢊ to advance the cursor one space manually
between inputting the two characters.
10
23:00 FRI 3/12
Title name
Set Thumbnail
23:00 Fri 3/12 Pr
4
4
Titles
Erase Section
9
8
7
20:00 FRI 3/12
Divide
20:00 Fri 3/12 Pr
9
Chapter Edit
Recent First
All Genres
Set Genre
Lock
22:00 THU 2/12
22:00 Thu 2/12 Pr
Cancel
19:00 MON 29/11
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr
HDD
SP
2
SP
1h00m(1.0G)
Remain
30h30m
84
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Editing
09
3
Use the playback controls (ꢆ, ꢋ, ꢉ, ꢊ, etc.) to
4
Highlight ‘From’ then use the playback controls
find a suitable frame, then press ENTER to set.
(ꢆ, ꢋ, ꢉ, ꢊ, etc.) to find the start of the section
to erase, then press ENTER.
The bar at the bottom of the screen indicates the current
play position in the title. After pressing ENTER, a marker
shows the start of the section.
Set Thumbnail (HDD)
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP
0h01m
Rec. time
Erase Section (HDD)
5-1
00.00.09.15
18:00 Mon 29/11 Pr
1
XP
ꢋ Play Pause
0h01m
OK
Exit
Rec. time
5-1
00.00.09.15
You can also use the chapter and time search features
(press PLAY MODE), and the CM SKIP buttons.
ꢋ Play Pause
From
To
Exit
4
Select ‘Exit’ to return to the Edit screen.
5
Highlight ‘To’ then, in the same way, find the
end of the section to erase, then press ENTER.
After pressing ENTER, another marker indicates the end
of the section, with the section itself marked in red.
Erase Section
HDD
VR mode
Using this command you can delete a part of a title, ideal
for cutting out the commercial breaks in a recording
made from the TV.
6
Select ‘Yes’ to confirm, or ‘No’ to cancel, then
press ENTER.
In the thumbnail viewer you can see a few seconds of
video either side of the marked section to see how the
edit will look.
1
Highlight the title containing the section you
want to erase.
• When editing VR mode Original content, you may not
be able to erase very short sections (less than five
seconds).
2
Select ‘Edit’ > ‘Erase Section’ from the command
menu panel.
3
HDD only: Select the type of edit.
Divide
DVD RECORDER
!
Please select the type of editing.
HDD
VR mode
Play List only
Video Mode Compatible Editing is
recommended for compatibility with
high-speed copying.
Use this command to divide a title into two. Note that
once divided, the two new HDD titles cannot be
recombined into one again.
Video Mode Compatible Editing
Frame Accurate Editing
1
Highlight the title you want to divide.
2
Select ‘Edit’ > ‘Divide’ from the command menu
panel.
• Video Mode Compatible Editing – Edit points
cannot be set with absolute precision, but high-
speed copying to Video mode DVD will be possible.
3
HDD only: Select the type of edit.
• Frame Accurate Editing – Exact edit points are
preserved, but high-speed copying to Video mode
DVD will not be possible.
DVD RECORDER
!
Please select the type of editing.
Video Mode Compatible Editing is
recommended for compatibility with
high-speed copying.
• For more information about these options, see
Editing accuracy on page 82
Video Mode Compatible Editing
Frame Accurate Editing
• Video Mode Compatible Editing – Edit points
cannot be set with absolute precision, but high-
speed copying to Video mode DVD will be possible.
85
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Editing
09
• Frame Accurate Editing – Exact edit points are
preserved, but high-speed copying to Video mode
DVD will not be possible.
• Video Mode Compatible Editing – Edit points
cannot be set with absolute precision, but high-
speed copying to Video mode DVD will be possible.
• For more information about these options, see
Editing accuracy on page 82
• Frame Accurate Editing – Exact edit points are
preserved, but high-speed copying to Video mode
DVD will not be possible.
4
Use the playback controls (ꢆ, ꢋ, ꢉ, ꢊ, etc.) to
find the place you want to divide the title.
• For more information about these options, see
Editing accuracy on page 82
Divide Title (HDD)
4
Select the command you want:
18:00 Mon 29/11 Pr
1
XP
• Divide – Divide a chapter into two or more parts: Use
the playback controls (ꢆ, ꢋ, ꢉ, ꢊ, etc.) to find the
point at which you want to divide the chapter, then
press ENTER.
0h01m
Rec. time
5–1
00.00.09.15
ꢋ
Play Pause
Divide
Cancel
Chapter Edit (DVD VR mode Play List)
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr
2
SP
Rec. time
Chapters
1h00m
5
5
Press ENTER to divide the title at the current
1–1
Play
0.00.00
ꢆ
playback position.
Exit
Divide
Erase/Move
Combine
6
Select ‘Yes’ to confirm you want to divide the
title, or ‘No’ to cancel.
You can keep dividing the chapter as many times as
you wish (up to 999 chapters per DVD disc or 99
chapters per HDD title).
Divided titles cannot
be combined.
OK?
!
1
2
Yes
No
• Erase /Move – Erase or move chapters: Select the
chapter you want to erase/move and press ENTER.
Select whether you want to erase or move the
chapter.
Chapter Edit
HDD
VR mode
Chapter Edit (DVD VR mode Play List)
19:00 Mon 29/11 P
When editing a VR mode DVD or video on the HDD you
can edit individual chapters within a title, with
commands for erasing, combining and dividing.
Erase
Rec. time
Chapter
1
Move
0
Cancel
001
002
003
004
005
Exit
Divide
Erase/Move
Combine
1
Highlight the title that contains the chapters you
want to edit.
Move command only: Select the destination for the
chapter, and press ENTER.
2
Select ‘Edit’ > ‘Chapter Edit’ from the command
menu panel.
3
• Combine – Combine two adjacent chapters into
3
HDD only: Select the type of edit.
one: Highlight the bar divider between two adjacent
chapters and press ENTER.
DVD RECORDER
!
Please select the type of editing.
Chapter Edit (DVD VR mode Play List)
Video Mode Compatible Editing is
recommended for compatibility with
high-speed copying.
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr
2
SP
Rec. time
003
1h00m
001
002
004
005
Video Mode Compatible Editing
Frame Accurate Editing
Exit
Divide
Erase/Move
Combine
5
Select ‘Exit’ to get back to the main Disc
Navigator screen.
Note
1.When editing VR mode Original content, it may not be possible to erase chapters less than five seconds long.
2.VR mode Play List only.
3.It may not always be possible to combine two chapters, even though they are adjacent. If a chapter has been divided into three, then the middle
chapter erased, it is not possible to combine the two remaining chapters into one.
86
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Editing
09
2
Select ‘Edit’ > ‘Lock’ from the command menu
Set Genre
panel.
HDD
Use this command to assign a genre to a title.
Disc Navigator (HDD)
10
10Titles
23:00 FRI 3/12
Title name
1
Highlight the title you want to assign a genre to.
23:00 Fri 3/12 Pr
4
Set Thumbnail
4
Titles
Erase Section
9
20:00 FRI 3/12
20:00 Fri 3/12 Pr
2
Select ‘Edit’ > ‘Set Genre’ from the command
Divide
9
Chapter Edit
Recent First
All Genres
menu panel.
Set Genre
8
7
22:00 THU 2/12
22:00 Thu 2/12 Pr
Lock
Cancel
Disc Navigator (HDD)
10
10Titles
19:00 MON 29/11
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr
HDD
SP
Remain
30h30m
23:00 FRI 3/12
2
SP
Title name
23:00 Fri 3/12 Pr
4
1h00m(1.0G)
Set Thumbnail
4
Titles
Erase Section
9
8
7
20:00 FRI 3/12
20:00 Fri 3/12 Pr
Divide
9
Chapter Edit
An unlocked title will become locked; a locked title will be
unlocked. Locked titles are shown in the Disc Navigator
with a padlock icon.
Recent First
All Genres
Set Genre
Lock
22:00 THU 2/12
22:00 Thu 2/12 Pr
Cancel
19:00 MON 29/11
HDD
SP
Remain
30h30m
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr
2
SP
1h00m(1.0G)
Move
VR mode
Play List only
3
Use the ꢀ/ꢁ buttons to select a genre for the
title, then press ENTER.
Use this function to re-arrange the playing order of Play
List titles.
Disc Navigator (HDD)
10Titles
1
Highlight the title you want to move.
10
23:00 FRI 3/12
23:00 Fri 3/12 Pr
4
No Category
2
Select ‘Edit’ > ‘Move’ from the command menu
4
Titles
Movies
9
panel.
20:00 FRI 3/12
Sport
Children
20:00 Fri 3/12 Pr
Recent First
All Genres
Other
Free1
8
7
22:00 THU 2/12
22:00 Thu 2/12 P
Disc Navigator (DVD)
1
Free2
10Titles
11/29 MON 7:00PM
11/29Mon 7:00PM
Title name
19:00 MON 29/11
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr
HDD
SP
2
SP
4
Titles
SetThumbnail
EraseSection
Divide
1h00m(1.0G)
2
3
4
Remain
30h30m
12/2 THU 10:00PM
12/2Thu 10:00PM
Chapter Edit
Play List
Move
Combine
12/3 FRI 8:00PM
12/3Fri 8:00PM 9
Lock
Cancel
12/3 FRI 11:00PM
12/3Fri 11:00PM 9ch SP
1h00m(1.0G)
DVD
VR Mode
HDD
Video mode VR mode
Original only
Remain
0h30m
You can lock a title so that it can’t be edited or erased
accidently. If you do need to edit it, you can always unlock
it later.
3
Select a new position in the Play List for the title,
then press ENTER.
Disc Navigator (DVD)
Important
10Titles
1
23:00 FRI 3/12
• You can’t undo any edits made before changing the
lock status. You also can’t undo a lock/unlock
command using the Undo option from the Disc
Navigator menu.
23:00 Fri 3/12 Pr
4
SP
2h00m(1.0G)
4
Titles
2
3
4
20:00 FRI 3/12
20:00 Fri 3/12 Pr
9
SP
Play List
2h00m(1.0G)
22:00 THU 2/12
22:00 Thu 2/12 Pr
7
SP
1
Highlight the title you want to lock (or unlock).
1h00m(1.0G)
19:00 MON 29/11
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr
DVD
2
SP
VR Mode
1h00m(1.0G)
Remain
0h30m
After pressing ENTER, the new, updated Play List is
displayed.
87
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Editing
09
2
Use the ꢀ/ꢁ buttons to select one of the user-
Combine
definable genre names, then press ENTER.
VR mode
Play List only
Use this function to combine two Play List titles into one.
Disc Navigator (HDD)
10Titles
10
23:00 FRI 3/12
1
Highlight the title you want to combine.
Free1
Free2
23:00 Fri 3/12 Pr
4
This title will remain in the same place after combining
with another title.
4
Titles
Free3
9
8
7
20:00 FRI 3/12
Free4
Free5
20:00 Fri 3/12 Pr
9
Recent First
All Genres
2
Select ‘Edit’ > ‘Combine’ from the command
Cancel
22:00 THU 2/12
22:00 Thu 2/12 Pr
menu panel.
19:00 MON 29/11
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr
HDD
SP
2
SP
Disc Navigator (DVD)
1h00m(1.0G)
Remain
30h30m
10Titles
1
23:00 FRI 3/12
23:00 Fri 3/12 Pr
Title name
3
Input a name for the genre.
SetThumbnail
4
Titles
EraseSection
2
20:00 FRI 3/12
20:00 Fri 3/12 Pr
The name can be up to 12 characters long.
Divide
Chapter Edit
Play List
Move
3
22:00 THU 2/12
22:00 Thu 2/12 P
Combine
Input Genre Name
Cancel
Free
1
4
19:00 MON 29/11
A B C D E F G H I
J
K L M .
,
)
I
?
:
!
;
DVD
CAPS
small
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr
2
SP
VR Mode
Remain
0h30m
N
O
P
A
O
2
Q
A
O
3
R S T U V WX Y Z
(
I
1h00m(1.0G)
ç
A A
A
O
4
A
O
5
[
§
·
Æ
O
6
E
U
8
E
U
9
÷
<<
E
U
<
x
E
U
=
I
I
#
%
D
0
N
1
+
ø
7
]
Y
>
{
ß $
_
&
~
}
–
/
@
¥
ˆ
±
|
¡
_
3
Select another title to combine with the first.
This title will be appended to the first title selected.
a
c
£
\
¨
© –
¬
–
®
˚
`
< < 14
/
o
1
1
3
2
3
¿
¸
µ
¶
–
/
2
/
4
´
Space
OK
Clear
After pressing ENTER, the new, updated Play List is
displayed.
4
To finish entering the name, highlight ‘OK’ and
Disc Navigator (DVD)
10Titles
press ENTER.
1
23:00 FRI 3/12
23:00 Fri 3/12 Pr
4
SP
2h00m(1.0G)
4
Titles
2
20:00 FRI 3/12
20:00 Fri 3/12 Pr
Multi Mode
9
SP
2h00m(1.0G)
Play List
HDD
3
22:00 THU 2/12
22:00 Thu 2/12 Pr
7
SP
1h00m(1.0G)
Multi Mode allows you to select several titles, then select
a command that will be applied to all of them. In this way
you can select multiple titles and then erase them all at
once, for example.
4
19:00 MON 29/11
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr
DVD
VR Mode
2
SP
1h00m(1.0G)
Remain
0h30m
1
Select ‘Multi Mode’ from the command menu
Genre Name
panel.
HDD
Disc Navigator (HDD)
10
10Titles
Use this command to rename one of the five user-
definable genres (Free 1–5).
23:00 FRI 3/12
Play
SP
23:00 Fri 3/12 Pr
4
Erase
2
Edit
4
Titles
1
Select ‘Genre Name’ from the command menu
9
8
7
20:00 FRI 3/12
20:00 Fri 3/12 Pr
9
S
panel.
Recent First
All Genres
Genre Name
22:00 THU 2/12
22:00 Thu 2/12 Pr
7
S
Disc Navigator (HDD)
10
Multi-Mode
10Titles
19:00 MON 29/11
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr
23:00 FRI 3/12
HDD
SP
Play
SP
2
SP
23:00 Fri 3/12 Pr
4
Erase
1h00m(1.0G)
Remain
30h30m
2
Edit
4
Titles
9
8
7
20:00 FRI 3/12
20:00 Fri 3/12 Pr
9
S
Recent First
All Genres
Genre Name
2
Select titles from the title list.
Use the ꢀ/ꢁ and ENTER buttons to select. Selected
titles are marked with a ꢅ.
22:00 THU 2/12
22:00 Thu 2/12 Pr
7
S
Multi Mode
19:00 MON 29/11
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr
HDD
SP
2
SP
1h00m(1.0G)
Remain
30h30m
88
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Editing
09
3
Select ‘Next’ from the command menu panel.
Frequently asked questions
• Why doesn’t the available recording time increase
when I erase titles from a VR mode DVD-R?
Disc Navigator (HDD)
Multi-Mode
10Titles
23:00 FRI 3/12
23:00 Fri 3/12 Pr
4
SP
When you erase titles from a DVD-R, the titles are no
longer displayed, but the content remains on the
disc. DVD-R is a write-once medium; it can’t be
erased or rewritten.
4
Titles
9
20:00 FRI 3/12
20:00 Fri 3/12 Pr
9
SNext
Recent First
All Genres
22:00 THU 2/12
22:00 Thu 2/12 Pr
7
S
Single Mode
19:00 MON 29/11
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr
HDD
SP
2
SP
• I can’t edit my disc!
1h00m(1.0G)
Remain
30h30m
You may find that as the available recording time is
reduced on a VR mode DVD-R disc, editing is no
longer possible. This is because information about
your edits requires a certain amount of disc space.
As you edit, this information builds up, eventually
preventing you from editing further.
4
Select the command that you want applied to all
the marked titles.
For example, select Erase to erase all the marked titles.
Disc Navigator (HDD)
Multi-Mode
10Titles
10
9
23:00 FRI 3/12
23:00 Fri 3/12 Pr
Erase
Lock
4
SP
4
Titles
Unlock
Change Genre
20:00 FRI 3/12
20:00 Fri 3/12 Pr
9
S
Recent First
All Genres
8
22:00 THU 2/12
22:00 Thu 2/12 Pr
Single Mode
S
7
Cancel
7
19:00 MON 29/11
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr
HDD
SP
2
SP
1h00m(1.0G)
Remain
30h30m
Once the command is completed, Multi Mode is
automatically exited.
Undo
Video mode VR mode
If you make a mistake while editing, you can generally
undo it. There are three levels of undo (in other words,
you can undo the last three edits you made).
1
Select ‘Undo’ from the command menu panel.
• You can’t undo anything after exiting the Disc
Navigator screen.
Disc Navigator (DVD)
10Titles
No title
Play
Erase
4
Titles
Edit
Play List
Make Playlist
Undo
DVD
VR Mode
Remain
0h30m
89
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Jukebox
10
Chapter 10
Using the Jukebox
The Jukebox feature allows you to use the recorder’s
HDD to store and playback music from up to 999 of your
CDs. Once on the HDD, you can name albums, assign
them a genre, and set tracks that you don’t want to play
to Jump.
ONE TOUCH
COPY
DVD
Copying CDs to the HDD
The first step is to copy some CDs to your HDD. This is
1
done in real-time. All tracks are copied from each CD as
an album. Although album and track names are not
copied, you can add these later (see Editing Jukebox
albums on page 91).
Usually, the tracks are copied to the HDD in the order
they appear on the CD. If you want to copy them in some
other order, set the CD to play in program play mode. See
Program play on page 67 for how to do this.
PLAY
Note that once copied to the HDD, audio tracks cannot
be recorded back to a DVD-R/RW disc.
Important
• During copying, no other recorder operation is
possible.
• Scheduled timer recordings will not start until
copying is complete.
• Copy protected CDs may not copy successfully.
DVD RECORDER
1
2
Press DVD.
Load the CD you want to copy to the HDD.
If you want to copy the CD with a different track order, set
the program play mode here.
3
4
Press ꢆ PLAY to starts CD playback.
Press ONE TOUCH COPY.
Alternatively, you can select DVD/CD ꢄ HDD from the
Copy submenu of the Home Menu.
The CD can be playing or stopped when you press ONE
TOUCH COPY. If the CD is playing, playback (and
copying) will start from the beginning of the CD.
Note
1.The recorder can copy up to 999 CDs; a CD can contain up to 99 tracks. The recorded audio format is 256 kbps Dolby Digital.
90
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Jukebox
10
Selecting a track from an album to play
Playing music from the Jukebox
1
Use the ꢀ/ꢁ buttons to select the album
You can select albums or individual tracks from the
containing the track you want to play, then press ꢃ.
1
Jukebox to play.
All tracks set to
play
1
Press Home Menu and select ‘Jukebox’.
The album list is displayed.
Jukebox
10Albums
10 Album1
ALL
1
Play
9
Album2
Erase
New First
All Genres
8
7
6
5
4
3
Album3
Album4
Album5
Album6
Album7
Album8
2
Edit
3
Play Mode
Genre Name
4
Disc Navigator
GUIDE Plus+
Easy Timer
Disc Setup
Initial Setup
Video/Audio Adjust
Copy
5
6
7
21:00 FRI 25/03
Repeat Off
Total 12 1.14.58
HDD
1-10
ꢆ
0.03.58
Play Mode
Remain
60h30m
Photo Viewer
Jukebox
Track set to Jump
2
Use the ꢀ/ꢁ buttons to select the album you
2
Use the ꢀ/ꢁ buttons to select the track you
want to play and press ENTER.
want to play and press ENTER.
• You can play tracks that are set to Jump like this
(after the track has played, the next track that doesn't
have Jump set will be played).
Album name
Jukebox
10Albums
10 Album1
ALL
1
Play
Erase
Edit
9
Album2
New First
All Genres
8
7
6
5
4
3
Album3
Album4
Album5
Album6
Album7
Album8
2
3
Play Mode
Editing Jukebox albums
4
Genre Name
5
A number of commands are available for editing and
changing the playback behaviour of albums.
6
7
21:00 FRI 25/03
Repeat Off
Total 12 1.14.58
HDD
1-10
ꢆ
0.03.58
1
Use the ꢀ/ꢁ/ꢂ/ꢃ buttons to select the album/
Remain
60h30m
track you want to edit.
Info for selected album
Playback status
2
3
Press ꢃ to display the command menu panel.
Use the ꢀ/ꢁ buttons to select a menu command
• The album always plays from the first track. Once all
tracks on the selected album have played, the next
album in the list will play (excluding tracks that have
been set to Jump—see Editing Jukebox albums on
page 91).
and press ENTER.
• Erase – Erase the selected track (if all tracks in an
album are selected, the whole album is erased).
• Edit > Album Name – Enter a name of up to 64
characters for the album. See page Title Name on
page 83 for how to enter names.
• Edit > Change Genre – Set or change the genre for
the album.
2
• Edit > Jump Set – Set a track to jump so that it
doesn't play (choose this command again to cancel
the Jump setting).
• Play Mode – Change the playback order for albums
and tracks.
• Genre Name – Enter a name of up to 12 characters
for a genre. See page Title Name on page 83 for how
to enter names.
Note
1.The digital audio output contains a copy-prohibit signal when albums are playing from the HDD.
2.Tracks set to Jump will be skipped during consecutive track playback.
91
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Jukebox
10
Changing the album view
1
From the album list, press ꢂ to display the view
options menu panel.
2
Select the view option you want, then press
ENTER.
Jukebox
10Albums
bum1
ALL
1
Play
Erase
Edit
Disp
New first
m2
N
Most Listened
Album Name
m3
m4
2
Genr
3
Recording Date
Play Mode
4
Al
m5
m6
m7
m8
Genre Name
Cancel
5
6
7
21:00 FRI 25/03
Repeat Off
Total 12 1.14.58
HDD
1-10
ꢆ
0.03.58
Remain
60h30m
• Display order
New First – Most recently copied CDs appear at the
top of the album list.
Most Listened – Most often listened to CDs appear
at the top of the list.
Album Name – Albums are listed alphabetically.
Recording Date – Albums are listed by the recording
date (oldest first).
• Genre
Jukebox
10Albums
bum1
Play
Erase
Edit
ALL
1
Disp
All Genres m2
N
No Category
m3
m4
m5
m6
m7
m8
2
Best
Rock
Pops
Gen
3
Play Mode
4
A
Genre Name
Jazz
5
Classical
6
7
21:00 FRI 25/03
Repeat Off
Total 12 1.14.58
HDD
1-10
ꢆ
0.03.58
Remain
60h30m
All – All albums are displayed.
Genre – Only albums in the selected genre are
displayed.
92
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The PhotoViewer
11
Chapter 11
The PhotoViewer
1
From the PhotoViewer you can view JPEG photos and picture files stored on a CD-ROM/R/RW on your TV.
Currently selected thumbnail
PhotoViewer
File
Chair No.
2
x
1920
3
1440
Date/Time 10:00 MON 24/1
File information
1
4
7
2
5
8
01. 12/12 TUE
02. 12/13 WED
03. 12/14 THU
04. 12/15 FRI
05. 12/16 SAT
06. 12/17 SUN
07. 12/18 MON
08. 12/19 TUE
Currently selected
folder in folder list
6
9
Pages in file
view
Pages in
folder list
1/2
1/3
Incompatible/unknown file
4
Use the ꢀ/ꢁ/ꢂ/ꢃ to select a thumbnail.
• Use the ꢌ and ꢍ buttons to display the previous/
next page of thumbnails.
Playing a slideshow
1
Press HOME MENU and select ‘PhotoViewer’ to
5
Press ENTER or ꢆ PLAY to start playing a
display the PhotoViewer screen.
slideshow from the selected thumbnail.
• Use the ꢌ PREV / NEXT ꢍ buttons to display the
previous/next picture, or the ꢋ PAUSE button to
pause the slideshow.
• The PhotoViewer is only accessible when a disc
containing JPEG files is loaded.
• If you encounter a disc that will not play, check that
the disc and file formats are compatible with this
recorder (see JPEG file compatibility and PC-created
disc compatibility on page 10).
• Depending on the aspect ratio, some pictures may be
displayed with black bars top and bottom, or left and
right.
2
Use the ꢀ/ꢁ buttons to select a folder from the
• Large picture files may take a few seconds to display.
This is normal.
folder list.
The first nine images from the selected folder are
displayed as thumbnails in the main part of the screen.
6
Press ꢅ STOP or RETURN to return to the
thumbnail view area.
• The larger the file size, the longer it takes the recorder
to load the file.
7
To return to the folder view area, press RETURN
(or ꢂ when the leftmost thumbnail is highlighted).
• To exit the PhotoViewer, press HOME MENU.
3
Press ENTER or ꢃto move to the thumbnail view
area.
The first thumbnail image is highlighted.
• To get back to the folder list, press RETURN (or ꢂ
when the leftmost thumbnail is highlighted).
Note
1.Up to 999 files or 99 folders are viewable, but if there are more files/folders than this on the disc it is still possible to view them all using the
Reload function (see the following page).
93
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The PhotoViewer
11
Reloading files from a disc
If you have a disc with a large number of files and/or
folders, you can still view all the images using the reload
function.
1
Use the ꢁ button to navigate to the last entry in
the folder list (‘Read next: ...’).
2
Press ENTER to load the next batch of up to 999
files/99 folders from the disc.
It will take a moment (at most a minute) to load in the
1
images.
Zooming the image
During a slideshow you can zoom in to enlarge a portion
of the picture by a factor of two or four. You can also move
the area of the picture displayed.
1
During a slideshow, use the CHANNEL + button
to zoom the picture.
2x Zoom
ꢄ
Repeated presses cycle between zoom off, 2x zoom and
4x zoom. The zoom factor is displayed on-screen.
2
Use the ꢀ/ꢁ/ꢂ/ꢃ to move the zoomed area
within the picture.
Rotating an image
You can rotate the displayed picture during a slideshow
so you can always view pictures the right way up,
whichever way they were taken.
•
During a slideshow, press ANGLE to rotate the
displayed picture clockwise by 90º.
Press ANGLE repeatedly to continue rotating the picture
in increments of 90º.
ꢄ
Note
1.You can press HOME MENU to exit the PhotoViewer screen while the recorder is reloading images. (If you enter the PhotoViewer again, it will
resume reloading.)
94
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The Disc Setup menu
12
Chapter 12
The Disc Setup menu
• Use the ꢉ/ꢊ buttons to change the cursor
position.
Introduction
• Select CAPS or small to change to upper or lower-
case, or use the CASE SELECTION buttons (ꢌ/
ꢍ).
From the Disc Setup menu you can name discs, lock the
contents to prevent accidental recording and erasure,
initialize and finalize discs. The Disc Setup menu is
accessed from the Home menu:
• You can also use the CLEAR button to delete
characters directly (press and hold for two seconds
to delete the whole name). For other remote control
key shortcuts, see Using the remote key shortcuts to
input a name on page 84.
•
Press HOME MENU and select ‘Disc Setup’.
Basic settings
• For discs formatted on a different DVD recorder, you
will see only a limited character set.
Input Disc Name
Lock Disc
VR mode Video mode
VR mode
When you initialize a disc for recording, the recorder
automatically assigns a name for the disc ranging from
DISC 1 to DISC 99. You can use the Input Disc Name
function to change the default disc name to something
more descriptive. This name appears when you load the
disc and when you display disc information on-screen.
• Default setting: Off
1
Disc Setup
On
Off
Basic
Input Disc Name
Lock Disc
Initialize
Finalize
Optimize HDD
1
Select ‘Input Disc Name’ from the Basic options,
then ‘Next Screen’.
Disc Setup
Set to On to prevent accidental recording, editing or
erasing of the disc loaded . If you need to unlock the disc
Input Disc Name
Lock Disc
Next Screen
Basic
2
Initialize
Finalize
to make edits, select Off.
Optimize HDD
Important
• A locked disc can still be initialized (which will
completely erase the disc).
2
Input a name for the disc up to 64 characters long
for a VR mode disc, or 40 for a Video mode disc.
Input Disc Name
DISC7
Initialize settings
A B C D E
F
G H
I
J
K L M
.
(
I
,
)
I
ß
_
}
˚
`
?
:
!
;
CAPS
small
N
A
D
0
O
A
N
1
P
A
O
2
Q
A
O
3
R
A
O
4
S T U V WX Y Z
ç
A
O
5
[
§
·
Æ
O
6
E
U
8
ˆ
E
U
9
÷
<<
E
U
<
x
E
U
=
I
I
#
%
DVD-R
DVD-RW
ø
7
]
Y
>
{
$
&
~
+
–
/
@
¥
±
|
¡
You can initialize a recordable DVD disc for either VR
mode or Video mode recording.
_
a
–
c
£
\
µ
¨
¸
©
¬
–
®
< < 14
/
o
–
1
3
2
3
1
¿
¶
/
2
/
4
´
OK
Space
Clear
The first time you load a new DVD-RW disc, it will be
automatically initialized for recording according to the
DVD-RW Auto Init. setting in the Initial Setup menu (see
page 105).
• Use the ꢀ/ꢁ/ꢂ/ꢃ and ENTER to select characters.
Note
1.You cannot input a name for a disc if the TV line system of the disc is different to the current setting of the recorder. See Additional information
about the TV system settings on page 107 for how to change the recorder’s setting.
2.You cannot change the lock setting for a disc if the TV line system of the disc is different to the current setting of the recorder. See Additional
information about the TV system settings on page 107 for how to change the recorder’s setting.
95
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The Disc Setup menu
12
New DVD-R discs are ready for Video mode recording
when you load them, but it is also possible to initialize
them for VR mode recording.
Important
• Optimizing the HDD can take as long as eight hours.
During optimization, playback and recording are not
possible.
The initialize menu here lets you reinitialize a disc, for
example if you want to change the recording format of
the disc. See Initializing a recordable DVD disc on page 60
for detailed instructions.
• Canceling optimization mid-way does not undo the
optimization already done, so the HDD will be partly
optimized.
•
Select ‘Optimize HDD’ from the disc Setup menu.
Finalize settings1
Disc Setup
Start
Basic
Start Optimization
Initialize
Finalize
Finalize
Optimize HDD
DVD-R
DVD-RW
Finalizing ‘fixes’ the recordings in place so that the disc
can be played on a regular DVD player or computer
equipped with a suitable DVD-ROM drive.
• Select ‘Start’ to optimize.
See Playing your recordings on other DVD players on
A progress bar indicates how long there is left to go.
page 59 for detailed instructions.
Undo Finalize
Initialize HDD
DVD-RW
HDD
You can undo the finalization on DVD-RW discs recorded
on this recorder in Video mode. You need to do this if you
want to record more material or edit material already on
the disc.
When your DVD recorder is working without a problem
this option is not visible in the Disc Setup menu.
However, if the HDD file system becomes corrupted for
some reason, you initialize the HDD to fix the problem.
Note that initializing the HDD will erase all the data on it.
You can also undo the finalization of VR mode discs
which have been finalized on other DVD recorders. If
when you load a disc the message This disc cannot be
recorded. Undo the finalization is displayed, use this
command to be able to record on the disc using this
recorder.
•
Select ‘Initialize HDD’ from the disc Setup menu.
Disc Setup
Start
Basic
Initialize
Initialize
Finalize
InitializeHDD
1
From the Disc Setup menu, select ‘Finalize’, then
‘Undo Finalize’ from the finalize options.
2
Select ‘Start’.
• Select ‘Start’ to initialize.
Optimize HDD
HDD
You’ll see a message appear on-screen recommending
you optimize the HDD.
As you record, erase and edit recordings, the HDD file
system gradually becomes fragmented. Periodically, the
HDD will need optimizing to ‘clean up’ all the fragmented
files.
Note
1.You cannot finalize a disc or use the Undo Finalize command if the TV line system of the disc is different to the current setting of the recorder.
See Additional information about the TV system settings on page 107 for how to change the recorder’s setting.
96
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The Video/Audio Adjust menu
13
Chapter 13
The Video/Audio Adjust menu
Using the Video/Audio Adjust menu you can set up the picture quality for the built-in tuner and external inputs, for disc
playback, and for recording.
You can press DISPLAY to see the individual settings for
the current preset (Tuner, VCR or LDP).
Setting the picture quality for TV and
4
Press ENTER to select the preset.
external inputs
Picture Creation lets you choose a set of picture quality
settings for the built-in TV tuner and for each external
input. There are several preset settings that suit various
sources, or you can create up to three of your own sets.
Creating your own set
There are three user presets in which you can save your
own set of picture quality settings.
1
Follow Choosing a preset above and select one of
Choosing a preset
the user presets (Memory 1, 2 or 3).
1
With the recorder stopped, press HOME MENU
2
Select ‘Detailed Settings’.
and select ‘Video/Audio Adjust’.
Pr 1
Memory1
Detailed Settings
Disc Navigator
GUIDE Plus+
Easy Timer
Disc Setup
Initial Setup
Video/Audio Adjust
Copy
3
Use the ꢀ/ꢁ buttons to select the picture quality
setting you want to adjust.
Play Mode
Memory1
Pr
1
Photo Viewer
Jukebox
Prog. Motion
PureCinma
YNR
Motion
Still
Auto1
2
3
Select ‘Video Adjust’.
Off
Off
Max
Max
Max
Use the ꢂ/ꢃ buttons to change the preset.
CNR
Detail
Min
Pr 1
White AGC
White Level
Off
Min
Max
Tuner
Detailed Settings
1
You can adjust the following settings:
• Use the INPUT SELECT button to switch between the
built-in TV tuner and the external inputs.
• Prog. Motion – Adjusts the motion and still picture
quality when video output is set to progressive.
• Use the CH +/– buttons to change the channel of the
built-in TV tuner.
• PureCinema – This setting optimizes the picture for
film material when the video output is set to
progressive. Usually this is best left set to Auto; try
switching to Off if the picture appears unnatural.
There are six presets available:
• Tuner – suitable for general TV broadcasts
• VCR – suitable for video cassettes
• LDP – suitable for Laserdiscs
• Memory1 – user preset 1
• YNR – Adjusts the amount of noise reduction (NR)
applied to the Y (brightness) component.
• CNR – Adjusts the amount of noise reduction (NR)
applied to the C (colour) component.
• Memory2 – user preset 2
• Detail – Adjusts how sharp edges appear.
• Memory3 – user preset 3
Note
1.When the DV input is selected, only Prog. Motion and PureCinema settings can be adjusted.
97
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The Video/Audio Adjust menu
13
• White AGC – Turn on for automatic white level
adjustment.
• Memory1 – user preset 1
• Memory2 – user preset 2
• Memory3 – user preset 3
1
• White Level – Adjusts the intensity of white.
• Black Level – Adjusts the intensity of black.
You can press DISPLAY to see the individual settings for
the current preset (TV(CRT), PDP or Professional).
• Black Setup – Corrects the standard reference black
level (NTSC video input only).
4
Press ENTER to select the preset.
• Gamma Correction – Adjusts the brightness of
darker images.
Creating your own set
There are three user presets in which you can save your
own set of picture quality settings for disc playback.
• Hue – Adjusts overall balance between red and
green.
• Chroma Level – Adjusts how rich the colours
appear.
1
Follow Choosing a preset above and select one of
the user presets (Memory 1, 2 or 3).
4
Use the ꢂ/ꢃ buttons to adjust the currently
selected picture quality setting.
2
Move the cursor down and select ‘Detailed
Settings’.
5
When you have all the settings as you want
them, press HOME MENU to exit.
You can now use the preset for any other input or the
built-in TV tuner.
Memory1
Detailed Settings
3
Select the picture quality setting you want to
Tip
adjust.
• To see more of the picture as you adjust different
settings, press ENTER after selecting the setting you
want to adjust.
Memory1
Prog. Motion
PureCinma
YNR
Motion
Still
Auto1
Off
Off
Max
Max
Max
Max
Max
BNR
Setting the picture quality for disc
playback
Detail
Off
White Level
Black Level
Min
Min
This setting determines how the picture will look when
playing discs.
You can adjust the following settings:
• Prog. Motion – Adjusts the motion and still picture
quality when video output is set to progressive.
Choosing a preset
1
With a disc playing (or paused), press HOME
• PureCinema – This setting optimizes the picture for
film material when the video output is set to
progressive. Usually this is best left set to
Auto 1; try switching to Auto 2, On or Off if the
picture appears unnatural.
MENU and select ‘Video/Audio Adjust’.
2
3
Select ‘Video Adjust’
Use the ꢂ/ꢃ buttons to change the setting.
• YNR – Adjusts the amount of noise reduction (NR)
applied to the Y (brightness) component.
TV(CRT)
Detailed Settings
• BNR – Adjusts the amount of noise reduction (NR)
applied to the block noise (artefacts visible in areas of
flat colour, caused by MPEG compression).
There are six presets available:
• Detail – Adjusts how sharp edges appear.
• TV(CRT) – suitable for standard cathode-ray tube TVs
• PDP – suitable for plasma display screens
• Professional – suitable for professional monitors
• White Level – Adjusts the intensity of white.
Note
1.When White AGC is On, the White Level setting can’t be adjusted.
98
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The Video/Audio Adjust menu
13
• Black Level – Adjusts the intensity of black.
• Black Setup – Corrects the standard reference black
level (NTSC video playback only).
• Gamma Correction – Adjusts the brightness of
darker images.
• Hue – Adjusts overall balance between red and
green.
• Chroma Level – Adjusts how rich the colours
appear.
4
Use the ꢂ/ꢃ buttons to adjust the currently
selected picture quality setting.
5
When you have all the settings as you want
them, press HOME MENU to exit.
Tip
• To see more of the picture as you adjust different
settings, press ENTER after selecting the setting you
want to adjust.
Audio DRC
• Default setting: Off
When watching Dolby Digital material at low volume, it’s
easy to lose low level sounds completely—including
some of the dialog. Switching on Audio DRC (Dynamic
Range Control) can help by bringing up the low level
sounds, while controlling high level peaks.
1
During playback or when paused, press HOME
MENU and select ‘Video/Audio Adjust’.
2
3
Select ‘Audio Adjust’.
Use the ꢂ/ꢃ buttons to adjust DRC from ‘Off‘ to
‘Max’.
Audio DRC
Audio DRC
Off
Max
Exactly how much difference you can hear between the
settings will depend on the material.
Tip
• Audio DRC is not effective when listening to a disc via
the digital output when Dolby Digital Out is set to
Dolby Digital. In this case adjust the dynamic range
from your AV amplifier/receiver.
99
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The Initial Setup menu
14
Chapter 14
The Initial Setup menu
Using the Initial Setup menu
The Initial Setup menu is where you can set various recorder options for sound, picture, language and so on.
Some settings can only be changed when the recorder is stopped. During playback and recording these settings are
grayed out in the Initial Setup menu.
Except for the Setup Navigator, menu screens are exited automatically after 20 minutes of inactivity.
•
Press HOME MENU and select ‘Initial Setup’.
In the table below, the default option is marked with a •.
Setting
Options
Explanation
Basic Settings
Clock Setting
Auto
Set the channel that broadcasts a clock signal and the clock will be set
automatically.
Manual •
If there is no channel that broadcasts a clock signal in your area, you
can set the time and date manually.
The clock must be set in order to use timer recording.
Input Line System
525 System
Use for NTSC or PAL-60 recording from an external input.
Use for standard PAL or SECAM recording.
625 System •
See also About the input line system on page 107 for more information on this setting.
Power Save
Mode 1
Mode 2
Off •
Only signals arriving at the antenna input are passed through to the
antenna output when the recorder is in standby.
No input signals are passed through to the outputs when the recorder
is in standby.
When the recorder is in standby, all signals arriving at the SCART and
antenna inputs are passed along to the outputs.
Help Setting
On •
Off
Switches on the automatic Help screens for GUI displays.
Switches off the automatic Help screens for GUI displays. (Press HELP
on the remote to manually display the Help screen.)
Setup Navigator
Start
Select to start the Setup Navigator. See also Switching on and setting
up on page 25.
100
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The Initial Setup menu
14
Setting
Options
Explanation
Tuner Settings
Auto Channel Setting Auto Scan
Select your country and then wait for the recorder to auto tune into
channels in your area. After auto scan has finished, the channel map-
ping screen appears showing which channels have been assigned to
which program numbers. You can skip unwanted channels using the
Manual Channel Setting option below.
Press HOME MENU to exit the channel mapping screen.
Download from TV
If your TV supports this feature you can download all the channels that
your TV is tuned to via the SCART input. Select your country and then
wait for the download to complete. After the download is complete, the
channel mapping screen appears, as above.
See also the operating instructions that came with your TV for more
information.
Manual CH Setting
Next Screen
Proceed to the next screen if you need to adjust any of the settings
made by auto tuning. Select your country, then proceed to the manual
channel setting screen:
• Change channel presets using the CH +/– buttons.
• To skip the displayed channel (because there is no station assigned
to that channel), change the Skip setting to On.
• Set the CH SYSTEM setting to match the channel system of your
country or region.
• Set the CHANNEL setting to the channel you want to assign to the
current channel preset.
• To manually fine tune the channel, change the AFT setting to Off
then adjust the Level setting.
• The Name field allows you to input a name of up to five characters
for the current channel preset.
• If the currently selected channel is scrambled requiring a decoder
connected to the AV2 (INPUT 1/DECODER), set the Decoder setting
to On.
Channel Swapping
Next Screen
Next Screen
Proceed to the next screen to swap channel assignments of different
presets so that you can group together presets that naturally go
together. Select two presets to swap then press ENTER.
Video In/Out Settings
Input Colour System
Proceed to the next screen to set the input colour system for each
channel preset. Use the CH +/– buttons to change the preset. On the
default Auto setting the recorder can generally correctly detect
whether the input signal is PAL, SECAM, 3.58 NTSC or PAL-60, but in
some cases you may have to set it manually if the picture is displayed
incorrectly.
See also About the input colour system on page 107 for more information on this setting.
Component Video Out Interlace •
Select if your monitor/TV is not compatible with progressive-scan
video.
Progressive
Select if your monitor/TV is progressive-scan compatible. Check the
operating instructions that came with your monitor/TV if you’re not
sure.
For Component Video Out to be effective, the AV1 Out setting (see page 102) must be set to something other than RGB.
101
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The Initial Setup menu
14
Setting
Options
Video •
Explanation
AV1 Out
Sets the AV1(RGB)-TV SCART output to standard composite video
(compatible with all TVs).
S-Video
RGB
Sets the AV1(RGB)-TV SCART output to S-video. Recommended if you
are using a long SCART cable.
Sets the AV1(RGB)-TV SCART output to RGB. Good quality but check
your TV for compatibility.
If you choose a setting that is incompatible with your TV you may not be able to see any picture at all. In this case either switch off and reconnect
using the supplied video cable, or reset the recorder (see Resetting the recorder on page 109).
The Component Video Out setting (see page 101) has no effect when AV1 Out is set to RGB.
AV2/L1 In
Video •
Sets the AV2 (INPUT 1/DECODER) SCART input to standard compos-
ite video.
S-Video
RGB
Sets the AV2 (INPUT 1/DECODER) SCART input to S-video.
Sets the AV2 (INPUT 1/DECODER) SCART input to RGB.
Decoder
Use this setting if you connected a decoder to the AV2 (INPUT 1/
DECODER) SCART connector. For scrambled channels, make sure that
the channel Decoder setting is set to On. (See Manual CH Setting
page 101.)
NTSC on PAL TV
On •
Off
NTSC discs will play correctly on PAL-only TVs.
Use if your TV is already NTSC-compatible.
Many recent PAL TVs are compatible with NTSC input and so this setting can be switched off. Check the operating instructions that came with
your TV. See also About NTSC on PAL TV on page 107 for related information.
Audio In Settings
Nicam Select
NICAM •
Record the NICAM audio in a NICAM broadcast.
Regular Audio
Record the non-NICAM audio in a NICAM broadcast. (You can still
switch the audio to record using the AUDIO button before recording.)
Tuner Level
Normal •
Standard setting.
Compression
Use if the audio level from the built-in tuner is excessive, causing dis-
tortion.
External Audio
Stereo •
Bilingual
Select if the audio from the currently selected external input is stan-
dard stereo.
Select if each channel carries a separate soundtrack.
When the external audio is from the DV input, an audio subcode channel within the DV audio tells the recorder whether the audio is stereo or
bilingual. This has priority over the setting you make here.
Bilingual Recording
A/L •
Record the left (A) channel of a bilingual source when recording to
HDD with HDD Recording Format set to Video Mode ON, to DVD in
Video mode or in LPCM mode, from an external source.
B/R
As above, but for right (B) channel recording.
When recording bilingual audio to DVD in VR mode (except in LPCM mode), or to HDD with HDD Recording Format set to Video Mode Off (except
in LPCM mode), both audio channels are recorded and you can switch to the one you want on playback.
102
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The Initial Setup menu
14
Setting
Options
Explanation
DV Input
Stereo 1 •
Select to use the ‘live’ audio track (recorded during the video shoot)
from a camcorder that supports two stereo audio tracks.
Stereo 2
Mix
Select to use the overdubbed audio track from a camcorder that sup-
ports two stereo audio tracks.
Select one of the three settings to use a mix of the two stereo audio
tracks.
Input Level (L1–L2)
-6dB – +6dB
(default: 0 dB)
Adjust the input level separately for each of the external inputs from
–6dB to +6dB in steps of 3dB.
Audio Out Settings
Digital Out
On •
Off
Activates the digital audio output.
Deactivates the digital audio output.
When set to Off, all the following Audio Out settings are grayed out.
Dolby Digital Out
DTS Out
Dolby Digital •
Output a Dolby Digital signal when a Dolby Digital source is being
played.
Dolby Digital ꢄ PCM Convert Dolby Digital sources to Linear PCM output. Use if your con-
nected equipment doesn’t have a Dolby Digital decoder.
On •
Off
Output a DTS signal when a DTS source is being played.
Switch off the digital output when a DTS source is being played. Use
when your connected equipment doesn’t have a DTS decoder. In this
case, use the analog audio outputs.
96 kHz PCM Out
MPEG Out
96 kHz ꢄ 48 kHz •
Convert 96 kHz digital audio sources to 48 kHz output. Use if your con-
nected equipment doesn’t support 96 kHz sampling rate.
96 kHz
MPEG
Output 96 kHz digital audio when a 96 kHz source is being played.
Output an MPEG audio signal when a source using MPEG audio is
being played.
MPEG ꢄ PCM •
Convert sources with MPEG audio to Linear PCM output. Use if your
connected equipment doesn’t have an MPEG audio decoder.
Language Settings
OSD Language
English •
Sets the language of the on-screen displays to English.
available languages
English •
Choose from the languages displayed for the on-screen displays.
Sets the default audio language for DVD-Video playback to English.
Audio Language
available languages
Choose from the languages displayed to set the default audio lan-
guage for DVD-Video playback.
Other
Select to set the default audio language to something other than the
ones listed. See Selecting other languages for language options on
page 108.
Discs do not necessarily have audio in your selected language. Also, some discs override the Audio Language preference.
103
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The Initial Setup menu
14
Setting
Options
Explanation
Subtitle Language
English •
Sets the default subtitle language for DVD-Video playback to English.
available languages
Choose from the languages displayed to set the default subtitle lan-
guage for DVD-Video playback.
Other
Select to set the default subtitle language to something other than the
ones listed. See Selecting other languages for language options on
page 108.
Discs do not necessarily have subtitles in your selected menu language. Also, some discs override the Subtitle Language preference.
Auto Language
On •
On this setting:
• DVD-Video discs whose main audio track is in your default language
will play using that language, without subtitles.
• Discs whose main audio track is not in your default language but
that have a subtitle track in your default language will play the original
audio track with subtitles.
Off
Select to play DVD-Video discs according to your audio and subtitle
language preferences.
For Auto Language to be effective, the Audio Language and Subtitle Language options must be set to the same language.
DVD Menu Language
w/Subtitle Language Sets the language of DVD-Video menus to the same as that set for the
•
subtitle language.
English
Sets the language of DVD-Video menus to English.
available languages
Choose from the displayed languages to set the default language for
DVD-Video menus.
Other
Select to set the DVD menu language to something other than the
ones listed. See Selecting other languages for language options on
page 108.
Discs do not necessarily have menus in your selected menu language.
Subtitle Display
On •
Select to have discs display subtitles according to your Subtitle Lan-
guage and Auto Language preferences.
Off
Select to switch off subtitle display.
Assist Subtitle
Select to display special additional assistive subtitles, where available.
Some discs may override these settings.
Recording Settings
Manual Recording
On (go to setup)
All the standard recording modes, plus MN1–32, LPCM and XP+
modes can be set.
Off •
Just the standard recording modes (XP, SP, LP, EP, SLP and SEP) can be
set.
See also Manual recording modes on page 116 for detailed information on manual recording levels.
Optimized Rec
On
The recording quality of timer recordings is automatically adjusted to
fit on to the selected media if it will not fit at the selected quality set-
ting. If the recording will not fit even at MN1, then the recording will
start at MN1 and stop when all the available space is used up.
Off •
When a timer recording is set that won’t fit on to the selected media,
the recording starts but is cut off when no more recording is possible.
Optimized Rec will only compensate for the next scheduled timer recording if more than one is set. It cannot be used together with VPS/PDC.
104
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The Initial Setup menu
14
Setting
Options
Explanation
Set Thumbnail
0 seconds •
Sets the default thumbnail picture in the Disc Navigator to the first
frame of the title.
30 seconds
3 minutes
Sets the default thumbnail picture to 30 seconds into the title.
Sets the default thumbnail picture to 3 minutes into the title.
Automatic chapter marking is switched off.
Auto Chapter (Video)
DVD-RW Auto Init.
No Separation
10 minutes •
When recording in Video mode, chapter markers are inserted every 10
minutes.
15 minutes
VR Mode •
Chapter markers are inserted every 15 minutes.
Blank DVD-RW discs are initialized for VR mode recording when
loaded into the recorder for the first time.
Video Mode
Blank DVD-RW discs are initialized for Video mode recording.
HDD Recording Format Video Mode Off
Recordings made to the HDD are made in VR mode. Use this setting if
you don’t need to transfer the recording later to a Video mode DVD.
Video Mode On •
Recordings made to the HDD are compatible with Video mode record-
ings. This setting is convenient if you want to transfer the recording to
a Video mode DVD as high-speed copy can be used.
When Video Mode On is used, you must select the audio channel you want to record when recording a bilingual broadcast. On the Video Mode Off
setting, both channels will be recorded and you can switch between them on playback. See also Bilingual Recording on page 102.
Playback Settings
TV Screen Size
4:3 (Letter Box) •
4:3 (Pan & Scan)
16:9
Select if you have a standard 4:3 TV and prefer the letter box format
presentation for widescreen material.
Select if you have a standard 4:3 TV and prefer the pan and scan pre-
sentation for widescreen material.
Select if you have a widescreen 16:9 TV. Your TV settings determine
how 4:3 material will look.
Selecting 4:3 (Letter Box) or 4:3 (Pan & Scan) does not guarantee that all video material will be presented in that format as some discs override
this setting.
Still Picture
Field
Produces a stable, generally shake-free image.
Frame
Auto •
Produces a sharper image, but more prone to shake than Field stills.
The recorder automatically selects Field or Frame type still, according
to the material playing.
Seamless Playback
On
Playback is smooth, but with a trade-off against the accuracy of the
edit points.
Off •
You may notice momentary interruption at edited points during play-
back of a VR mode Play List.
105
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The Initial Setup menu
14
Setting
Options
Explanation
Parental Lock
Set Password
In order to change the parental lock level or change the country/area
code, set the password using this option. From the following screen,
enter a four-digit number that will be your password.
Change Password
Change Level
In order to change the password, first enter your existing password
and then a new one from the following screen.
From the following screen, first enter your password and then set a
parental lock level.
Country/Area Code
From the following screen, first enter your password and then set a
country/area code.
Only certain discs have parental lock and country code features. Check the disc packaging to see what features the disc has. If you forget your
password you can reset it by resetting the recorder to its factory settings. See Resetting the recorder on page 109.
Angle Indicator
On •
A camera icon appears on-screen during multi-angle scenes on a
DVD-Video disc.
Off
Nothing is indicated on-screen when a multi-angle scene is showing.
Options
On-Screen Display
On •
Off
The recorder displays operation displays (Stop, Play, etc.) on-screen.
Switches off the on-screen operation displays.
Front Panel Display
On •
The time is shown in the front panel display when the recorder is in
standby.
Off
The front panel display is switched off in standby (although it still lights
dimly when setting a timer recording).
Remote Control Mode Recorder 1–3
(default: Recorder 1)
If you are using more than one recorder in the same room, set them to
different IDs. This setting sets the recorder ID; to change the remote
controller ID, press and hold RETURN then press 1, 2 or 3 to set. The
remote will only control a recorder with the same ID.
AV. Link
This Recorder Only • Signals received through the AV input when the recorder is in standby
are not passed through to the AV output.
Pass Through
Signals received when in standby are passed though to the output for
connected devices. (Note that during EPG data download, the EPG
data is not passed through.)
When set to Pass Through, make sure to set Power Save (page 100) to Off.
106
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The Initial Setup menu
14
About the input colour system
Additional information about the TV system
settings
The available options of the Input Colour System setting
depend on the Input Line System setting. The table below
shows the different options available.
About the input line system
This recorder is compatible with PAL, SECAM, 3.58 NTSC
and PAL-60 TV systems. The Input Line System and Input
Colour System settings determine how the recorder
treats incoming video signals from an external input or
the built-in TV tuner.
Input Line System Built-in tuner External input
625 System
Auto
PAL
Auto
PAL
SECAM
n/a
SECAM
Auto
Please note the following points when changing the
input line system:
525 System
• When the current input is a built-in tuner channel
preset, changing the input line system will usually
also affect the input line system of the AV2 (INPUT 1/
DECODER) input. However if the AV2/L1 In setting is
set to Decoder, then the L2 input is affected instead.
3.58 NTSC
PAL–60
Additional information about component
• If, when the Input Line System setting is changed, the
screen goes blank (due to incompatibility with your
TV), you can switch back by pressing and holding the
front panel ꢅ STOP button then pressing ꢄ OPEN/
CLOSE (also front panel) while the recorder is
stopped.
video output
If you switch the Component Video Out setting to
Progressive when using a TV that is not compatible
with progressive-scan video, you will not be able to see
anything displayed on your TV. If this happens, press and
hold the ꢅ STOP button on the front panel, then press
ꢆ PLAY. This will set the recorder’s video output back to
Interlace.
• When you switch the Input Line System setting the
Copy List is erased. If you switch the setting using the
ꢅ STOP button and ꢄ OPEN/CLOSE buttons as
described above, there is no confirmation, so please
use with care.
Compatibility of this unit with progressive-scan TVs
Consumers should note that not all high-definition television sets
are fully compatible with this product and may cause artifacts to
be displayed in the picture. In case of 525 progressive scan
picture problems, it is recommended that the user switch the
connection to the ‘standard definition’ output (Interlace). If there
are questions regarding our TV set compatibility with this model,
please contact our customer service center.
• You can’t mix recordings of different TV line systems
on the same disc.
• When you change this setting, the Input Colour
System setting also changes (see below).
About NTSC on PAL TV
This recorder is compatible with the following Pioneer displays
and monitors
Depending on the Input Line System setting and the
NTSC on PAL TV setting, the signal format output when
the recorder is stopped varies as shown in the table
below.
Plasma display
•PDP-503HDE, PDP-433HDE, PDP-434HDE, PDP-504HDE, PDP-
435XDE, PDP-435HDE, PDP-435FDE, PDP-505XDE, PDP-
505HDE, PDP-615EX
NTSC on PAL
TV
Output when
stopped
Input Line System
625 System
Off
On
Off
On
PAL
PAL
525 System
NTSC
PAL–60
107
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The Initial Setup menu
14
Selecting other languages for language
options
1
Select ‘Other’ from the language list.
This option appears in the settings for DVD Menu
Language, Audio Language, and Subtitle Language.
2
Select the language you want.
Initial Setup
Basic
OSD DVD Menu Language
Tuner
Audio
Language
English
Video In/Out
Audio In
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
Subti
0
1
4
Number
Auto
5
DVD
Subti
• Select by language name: Use the ꢂ/ꢃ buttons to
change the language.
• Select by code number: Press ꢁ then use the
number buttons to enter the four-digit language
code.
See Language code list on page 117 for a list of available
languages and corresponding codes.
3
Press ENTER to confirm and exit the screen.
108
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional information
15
Chapter 15
Additional information
Maker
Code
66
Resetting the recorder
Alba
If you need to, you can reset the recorder to all its factory
settings.
Bush
76
Finlux
84
1
Make sure that the recorder is on.
Fisher
61, 65
77
2
ON.
Press and hold ꢅ STOP and press ꢃ STANDBY/
Fujitsu
Funai
The recorder turns off with all settings reset.
67
Goldstar
Grandiente
Grundig
Hitachi
ITT
79
Setting up the remote to control your
TV
87
51, 82
56, 60, 83, 86
70
You can use the supplied remote to control your TV. To be
able to use this feature you first have to program the
remote with a maker code from the table below.
1
Press and hold down the CLEAR button, then
Mitsubishi
Nokia
59
enter the maker code for your TV.
The LED indicator on the remote controls lights.
53, 81
58, 72
57, 85
50, 80
68
See the table below for the list of maker codes. If there is
more than one code given for your make, input the first
one in the list.
Panasonic
Philips
Pioneer
RCA
• If the maker’s name of your TV doesn’t appear in the
table below, you will not be able to use this remote to
control your TV.
2
Press ꢃ TV to check that the remote works with
Salora
Samsung
Sanyo
71
your TV.
73, 75
74
If the remote is set up correctly, the TV should switch on/
off. If it doesn’t and there is another code given for your
maker, repeat step 1 with a new code.
Sei
78
Using the TV remote control buttons
The table below shows how to use this remote control
with your TV.
Sharp
52
Sony
54
Tandy
69
Button
What it does
Telefunken
Thomson
Toshiba
JVC
64
ꢃ TV
Press to switch the TV on/off (standby)
62
INPUT SELECT Press to change the TV’s video input
TV VOLUME Use to adjust the TV volume
TV CHANNEL Use to change TV channels
55
63
109
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional information
15
Screen sizes and disc formats
When viewing on a standard TV or monitor
Screen format of disc Setting
Appearance
16:9
4:3 (Letter Box)
4:3 (Pan & Scan)
16:9
The program is shown in
widescreen with black bars at
the top and bottom of the
screen.
The sides of the program are
cropped so that the picture
fills the whole screen.
4:3
The program appears
squashed. Set to either 4:3
(Letter Box) or 4:3 (Pan &
Scan).
4:3 (Letter Box)
4:3 (Pan & Scan)
The program is presented
correctly on either setting.
When viewing on a widescreen TV or monitor
Screen format of disc Setting
Appearance
16:9
16:9
The program is presented in
widescreen.
4:3
16:9
Your TV will determine how the
picture is presented—check
the manual that came with the
TV for details.
110
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional information
15
Minimum copying times
The table below shows the minimum HDD to DVD copying time for one hour of video.
1
Please note that not all discs are compatible with high-speed copying. Check with the disc manufacturer for
compatibility.
DVD disc type
*3
*4
*4
*5
*5
Rec
mode
DVD-R Ver. 2.0
DVD-RW Ver. 1.1/2x
DVD-R Ver. 2.0/4x
DVD-R Ver. 2.0/8x
DVD-R Ver. 2.1/8x
DVD-R Ver. 2.0/16x
DVD-R Ver. 2.1/16x
*1
DVD-RW Ver. 1.2/6x
DVD-RW Ver. 1.0, 1.1
*2
*3
DVD-RW Ver. 1.2/4x
1.5 mins.
2 mins.
SEP
SLP
EP
6 mins.
7.5 mins.
10 mins.
15 mins.
30 mins.
60 mins.
3 mins.
4 mins.
1.25 mins.
1.5 mins.
2 mins.
1.1 mins.
1.25 mins.
1.5 mins.
2 mins.
1 min.
1.1 mins.
1.25 mins.
1.5 mins.
3 mins.
5 mins.
2.5 mins.
4 mins.
LP
7.5 mins.
15 mins.
30 mins.
2.5 mins.
5 mins.
SP
7.5 mins.
15 mins.
4 mins.
XP
10 mins.
8 mins.
6 mins.
Note that all times in the above table are approximate.
*1 Compatible with single speed recording only
*2 Compatible with 2x speed recording
*3 Compatible with 4x speed recording
*4 Compatible with 8x speed recording.
*5 Compatible with 12x speed recording.
Note that actual copy speed varies with the part of the disc being
recorded.
The table below shows 16x DVD-R and 6x DVD-RW disc brands that have been tested for high-speed writing
compatibility with this recorder.
*1
*2
16x DVD-R
6x DVD-RW
Maker
Manufacturer ID
Maker
Manufacturer ID
Sony
That’s
TDK
“SONY16D1”
“TYG03”
“TTH02”
JVC
MCC (MKM)
“JVC1Victord7”
“MKM01RW6x”
Maxell
“MXL RG04”
*1 Compatible with 12x speed recording
*2 Compatible with 6x speed recording
Note
1.There may be cases where even 2x/4x/6x/8x/16x compatible discs do not copy at full speed. High speed copying is not possible when using
discs initialized on another recorder.
111
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional information
Troubleshooting
15
Incorrect operation is often mistaken for trouble and malfunction. If you think there is something wrong with this
component, please check the points below. Sometimes the trouble may lie in another component. Investigate the
other components and electrical appliances being used. If the trouble cannot be rectified even after checking the
points below, ask your nearest Pioneer authorized service center or your dealer to carry out repair work.
General
Problem
Remedy
The disc is automatically ejected
after closing the disc tray
• Check that the disc is not a DVD+R/RW or other incompatible format disc
(page 9).
• Check that the disc is loaded properly (aligned in disc tray and label-side up).
• Take out the disc and clean it (page 119).
• Check that the disc has a region code compatible with the recorder (page 122).
No picture
• Check that everything is connected properly (page 12).
• Check that the connected TV and/or the AV amp/receiver is set to the correct
input.
• The recorder may be set to progresive scan with an incompatible TV.
Reset to interlace by pressing and holding the front panel ꢅ STOP button then
pressing ꢆ PLAY.
Can’t play a disc
• Check that the disc is not a DVD+R/RW or other incompatible format disc
(page 9).
• Take out the disc and clean it (page 119).
• Check that the disc is loaded properly (aligned in disc tray and label-side up).
• There may be condensation in the recorder. Leave the recorder for an hour or so
for the condensation to evaporate.
• During HDD recording, you can’t play discs that are recorded with a Line System
different to the current recorder setting.
All settings are reset
• If the recorder is unplugged (or there is a power failure) while the recorder is on,
all the settings will be lost.
• Make sure that you switch the recorder into standby before unplugging the
power cord.
Remote control does not work
• If you connected this recorder to another Pioneer product using the CONTROL
IN jack, point the remote control at the other component to use (page 12).
• Set the remote control to the same ID number as the recorder (page 106). (When
the batteries run down, the remote mode is automatically reset to Recorder1.)
• Use the remote within its operating range (page 8).
• Replace the batteries (page 8).
No sound or sound is distorted
• Make sure that the amp/receiver or TV is set to the correct input and the volume
turned up.
• There is no sound when the picture is paused, or during scanning or slow
motion play. Press ꢆ PLAY to resume regular playback.
• DTS discs can only be played if this recorder is connected to a DTS decoder or
DTS compatible amp/receiver. If you have connected a suitable decoder, also make
sure that the Initial Setup > Audio Out > DTS Out setting is On.
• Some 96kHz discs do not output audio through the digital jack. In this case,
switch the input of your amp/receiver to analog.
• Check the audio cable connections (page 12).
• If the sound is distorted, try cleaning the cable plugs.
The picture from the external input • If the video signal from the external component is copy-protected, you cannot
is distorted
connect via this recorder. Connect the component directly to your TV.
112
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional information
15
Problem
Remedy
The picture is distorted
• Change the Input Line System setting (page 107). (You can also change it by
pressing the ꢅ STOP button and ꢄ OPEN/CLOSE on the front panel
simultaneously with the recorder stopped.)
Screen is stretched vertically or hori- • Make sure that the TV Screen Size setting (page 105) is correct for the kind of TV
zontally
you have (see also page 110).
• If you have a widescreen TV, check its aspect ratio settings.
• This recorder’s input switches into wide mode automatically according to the
input signal. When the unit connected is not compatible with VIDEO ID-1
(widescreen signalling), set the connected component to output 4:3 aspect ratio
(standard) video.
Can’t play a disc recorded using this • If the disc was recorded in Video mode, make sure that it’s finalized (page 59).
recorder on another player
•Some players will not play recordable DVD discs, even when recorded in Video
mode and finalized.
• If the disc was recorded in VR mode, the other player must be specifically RW
compatible in order to play it (page 9).
• Discs recorded with copy-once material cannot be played on non-CPRM
compatible players (page 50).
During playback the picture is dark • When a copy-protected disc is played via a VCR, the picture will not display
or distorted
correctly. Connect the recorder directly to your TV.
Can’t control your TV using this
remote control
• If there is more than one code listed for your make of TV, try each one in turn
(page 109).
• It is possible that none of the codes listed will work with your particular model of
TV, even if the maker appears in the remote control code list.
Can’t record or does not record suc- • Check that there is some remaining blank space on the DVD/HDD.
cessfully
• For a Video mode disc, check that the disc isn’t already finalized.
• The HDD may contain up to 999 titles; one DVD disc 99 (Original) titles and 999
chapters (VR mode), or 99 chapters (Video mode). Check that these limits have not
been reached.
• Check that the source you are trying to record is not copy protected.
• For a VR formatted disc, check that the disc isn’t locked (page 95).
• Check that you are recording with the same TV system (PAL, NTSC, etc.) as the
disc has already been recorded in. All recordings on a disc must be in the same TV
system. When recording to the HDD, it is also necessary to set the Input Line
System setting to match what you want to record (page 107).
• The power may have failed during recording.
Timer program doesn’t record suc- • When setting the recording channel, make sure you set the recorder’s built-in TV
cessfully
tuner, not the TV’s built-in tuner.
• When recording to a Video mode disc, programs that are copy-once protected
cannot be recorded. Use a VR mode formatted disc for copy-once material
(page 50).
• Two timer programs may have overlapped, in which case only the earlier one will
record completely.
• The power may have failed during recording.
After briefly unplugging or after a • A backup battery inside the recorder keeps the clock and other settings from
power failure the front panel dis-
play shows ‘--:--’
being reset when there is no power to the recorder. This battery should last
approximately five years from factory shipping.
Reset the clock and other recorder settings to use the recorder again. To have the
battery replaced, contact your dealer or a Pioneer Service Center.
Front panel display shows ‘LOCK’
when a button is pressed
• The Child Lock is on; turn off in order to use the recorder (page 55).
113
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional information
15
Problem
Remedy
Can’t use One Touch Copy (HDD to • Make sure that there is a recordable DVD loaded with some free space for
DVD)
recording and fewer than 99 titles already on the disc. Also make sure that for a
Video mode disc, the disc isn’t finalized.
• If the title currently playing contains material that is copy-once protected, One
Touch Copy will not work.
• If the currently playing HDD content was recorded in XP+ mode, the One Touch
Copy feature can’t be used.
• One Touch Copy doesn’t work if the recorder is already recording to DVD.
Can’t use One Touch Copy (DVD to • Make sure that there is space available on the HDD and that there are fewer than
HDD)
999 titles on the HDD.
• One Touch Copy doesn’t work if the recorder is already recording to the HDD.
The picture freezes and the front
panel and remote control buttons
stop working
• Press ꢅ STOP then try restarting playback.
• Press the front panel ꢃ STANDBY/ON button to switch the power off, then
switch back on and restart playback. If the power fails to switch off, press and hold
ꢃ STANDBY/ON for 10 seconds until the power switches off.
If the unit does not operate normally due to external effects such as static electricity, disconnect the power plug from the
outlet and insert again to return to normal operating conditions.
high-speed copy). Alternatively, you could copy the
material in SP (or Optimized) mode so as to fit it all on
to one disc (note that there will be a loss in picture
quality if you do this).
Frequently asked questions
In this section you can find answers to frequently asked
questions on how to use your DVD recorder and what it
can do.
See also Copying and back-up on page 71.
• How do I make a high-quality copy?
• Can I record a bilingual broadcast to the HDD, keeping
both audio channels and switch them on playback?
We recommend that you use the high-speed copy
mode. Although the copy is faster than real time,
there is no loss of picture or sound quality compared
to the original.
Yes. When HDD Recording Format is set to Video
Mode Off (see HDD Recording Format on page 105) ,
both channels of the broadcast are recorded (unless
you set the recording mode to LPCM, in which case
only the channel set using the Bilingual Recording
setting will be recorded; see Using the built-in TV
tuner on page 31).
If there is not enough space on the disc to make a
copy at the same picture quality as the original, we
recommend that you change the recording mode to
‘Optimized’. This will fit the recording on to the
available space on the disc.
See also Copying and back-up on page 71.
• Can I record continuously on the HDD for more than
12 hours?
• Can I make a DVD copy of, say, a movie that has had
the commercials edited out?
Yes, timer recordings made to the HDD can by set for
up to 24 hours . However, because the maximum
length of a title is 12 hours, the recording will be
spread over two titles. Note that there will be a short
break in the recording between titles.
Yes. There are two ways to do this. You can either edit
the video on the HDD then copy the edited version to
DVD, or you can assemble a Copy List that cuts out
the commercials, then record that to DVD.
See also Setting a timer recording on page 53.
See also Copying and back-up on page 71.
• Can I copy a finalized Video mode disc (DVD-R or DVD-
RW) to the HDD?
• I have a two-hour recording on the HDD made in XP
mode. Can I copy this to DVD in high-speed mode?
Yes. Start playing the Video mode disc and use the
One Touch Copy button to copy the currently playing
title to the HDD. Repeat for as many titles on the disc
as you want to copy.
A standard DVD disc can hold only an hour of XP
mode material, so you wouldn’t be able to make a
high-speed copy of this on to one disc. You could
divide up the recording on the HDD into two titles of
an hour each and copy these to two DVDs (using
See also Copying from DVD to HDD on page 75.
114
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional information
15
• Picture disturbance in the recording may occur if the
source component pauses playback or plays an
unrecorded section of tape, or if the power fails in the
source component, or the DV cable becomes
disconnected.
• Can I use high-speed copy to copy from DVD to HDD?
You can only use high-speed copy from DVD to HDD
when copying Original titles from a VR mode DVD-R
or DVD-RW disc.
• The DV IN jack is an input only. There is no output
functionality.
See also Copying from DVD to HDD on page 75.
• Can I copy a copy-once protected program from a
subscription satellite or cable channel to a DVD from
the HDD?
DV-related messages
You may see the following messages appear on your TV
screen when using the DV IN jack.
Yes, you can use high-speed copy to copy to a VR
mode disc. You can also divide the recording on the
HDD into a number of smaller titles if the whole
recording won’t fit on to one disc.
• No DV camcorder connected. – The camcorder is
not connected properly, or the camcorder is switched
off.
• The DV camcorder is recording. – The camcorder is
recording, so you cannot start recording from the
camcorder to this recorder.
See also Copying from HDD to DVD on page 72.
• Can I play a DVD I recorded on this recorder on another
DVD player?
• You cannot connect more than one DV
camcorder at the same time. – The DV jack on this
recorder supports connection to just one camcorder.
Yes, you can generally play finalized Video mode
discs recorded on this recorder on any standard DVD
player. You may find, however, that some players will
not play some recordable media.
• No tape in the DV camcorder. – There is no
cassette loaded into the connected equipment.
• The DV camcorder is in record-pause mode. – The
camcorder is in record-pause mode.
For VR mode DVD-RW discs, look for the ‘RW
Compatible’ mark to see if it will play the disc.
• DV camcorder playback canceled.
Recording has been paused. – Recording was
paused because the camcorder is not in playback
mode.
About DV
• Cannot operate the DV camcorder. – This recorder
cannot control the camcorder. Try switching off the
camcorder then switching it back on.
Using DV, also known as i.LINK, you can connect a DV-
equipped camcorder to this recorder using a single DV
cable for input of audio, video, data and control signals.
• Could not operate the DV camcorder. – This
recorder was not able to control the camcorder.
The i.LINK interface is also known as IEEE 1394-1995.
“i.LINK” and the “i.LINK” logo are trademarks.
• Recording has stopped because the recorded
material on the tape finished. – When the recorded
part of the DV tape comes to an end, this recorder
automatically stops recording.
• This recorder is only compatible with DV-format
(DVC-SD) camcorders. Digital satellite receivers and
Digital VHS video recorders are not compatible.
• You cannot connect more than one DV camcorder at
a time to this recorder.
• Recording has stopped because DV camcorder
playback stopped. – Recording stopped because
DV camcorder playback was stopped or the
camcorder was disconnected.
• You cannot control this recorder from external
equipment connected via the DV IN jack.
• It may not always be possible to control the
connected camcorder via the DV IN jack.
• The DV camcorder is not set for playback. Please
select playback mode on the DV camcorder. – The
camcorder is in camera mode.
• Digital camcorders can usually record audio as
stereo 16-bit/48kHz, or twin stereo tracks of 12-bit/
32kHz. This recorder can only record one stereo
audio track. Set the DV Input setting as required (see
DV Input on page 103).
• Audio input to the DV IN jack should be 32 or 48kHz
(not 44.1kHz).
115
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional information
Manual recording modes
15
The table below shows the approximate recording times for a VR mode and Video mode DVD in each manual recording
mode, as well as the standard recording mode equivalents. Levels separated by a bold line show where there is a
noticeable change in picture quality.
Audio recording in all manual recording modes is in Dolby Digital 2ch format, except for LPCM mode, which is in
Linear PCM format.
Video mode Off (HDD)
VR mode (DVD)
Video mode On (HDD)
Video mode (DVD)
Resolution* Level
Rec. time
Level
Rec. time Resolution*
MN 1
MN 2
MN 3
MN 4
MN 5
MN 6
802 mins.
720 mins.
600 mins.
480 mins.
420 mins.
360 mins.
300 mins.
270 mins.
240 mins.
230 mins.
220 mins.
210 mins.
200 mins.
190 mins.
180 mins.
170 mins.
160 mins.
150 mins.
140 mins.
130 mins.
120 mins.
110 mins.
105 mins.
100 mins.
95 mins.
90 mins.
85 mins.
80 mins.
75 mins.
70 mins.
65 mins.
61 mins.
61 mins.
41 mins.
MN 1
MN 2
MN 3
MN 4
MN 5
MN 6
MN 7
MN 8
802 mins.
720 mins.
600 mins.
480 mins.
420 mins.
360 mins.
300 mins.
270 mins.
240 mins.
230 mins.
220 mins.
210 mins.
200 mins.
190 mins.
180 mins.
170 mins.
160 mins.
150 mins.
140 mins.
130 mins.
120 mins.
110 mins.
105 mins.
100 mins.
95 mins.
90 mins.
85 mins.
80 mins.
75 mins.
70 mins.
65 mins.
61 mins.
61 mins.
41 mins.
SEP
SLP
352 x 240 /
352 x 288
352 x 240 /
352 x 288
EP
LP
352 x 480 / MN 7
352 x 576
MN 8
MN 9
352 x 480 /
352 x 576
MN 9
480 x 480 /
480 x 576
MN 10
MN 11
MN 12
MN 13
MN 14
MN 15
MN 16
MN 17
MN 18
MN 19
MN 20
MN 21
MN 22
MN 23
MN 24
MN 25
MN 26
MN 27
MN 28
MN 29
MN 30
MN 31
MN 32
LPCM
XP+**
MN 10
MN 11
MN 12
MN 13
MN 14
MN 15
MN 16
MN 17
MN 18
MN 19
MN 20
MN 21
MN 22
MN 23
MN 24
MN 25
MN 26
MN 27
MN 28
MN 29
MN 30
MN 31
MN 32
LPCM
XP+**
544 x 480 /
544 x 576
SP
720 x 480 /
720 x 576
720 x 480 /
720 x 576
XP
* The first figure refers to when the Input Line System is set to 525 System; the second when set to 625 System.
** XP+ mode is available for HDD recording only. If set for a DVD recording, the DVD will be recorded in MN32 mode.
When recording to the HDD, recording for the times given will use approximately 4.7 GB of HDD space (equivalent to
one recordable DVD).
See also Recording on page 49.
116
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional information
15
Language code list
Language (Language code letter), Language code
Japanese (ja), 1001
English (en), 0514
French (fr), 0618
German (de), 0405
Italian (it), 0920
Spanish (es), 0519
Chinese (zh), 2608
Dutch (nl), 1412
Portuguese (pt), 1620
Swedish (sv), 1922
Russian (ru), 1821
Korean (ko), 1115
Greek (el), 0512
Bhutani (dz), 0426
Esperanto (eo), 0515
Estonian (et), 0520
Basque (eu), 0521
Persian (fa), 0601
Finnish (fi), 0609
Fiji (fj), 0610
Faroese (fo), 0615
Frisian (fy), 0625
Kirghiz (ky), 1125
Latin (la), 1201
Lingala (ln), 1214
Sinhalese (si), 1909
Slovak (sk), 1911
Slovenian (sl), 1912
Samoan (sm), 1913
Shona (sn), 1914
Somali (so), 1915
Albanian (sq), 1917
Serbian (sr), 1918
Siswati (ss), 1919
Sesotho (st), 1920
Sundanese (su), 1921
Swahili (sw), 1923
Tamil (ta), 2001
Laothian (lo), 1215
Lithuanian (lt), 1220
Latvian (lv), 1222
Malagasy (mg), 1307
Maori (mi), 1309
Macedonian (mk), 1311
Malayalam (ml), 1312
Mongolian (mn), 1314
Moldavian (mo), 1315
Marathi (mr), 1318
Malay (ms), 1319
Maltese (mt), 1320
Burmese (my), 1325
Nauru (na), 1401
Irish (ga), 0701
Scots-Gaelic (gd), 0704
Galician (gl), 0712
Guarani (gn), 0714
Gujarati (gu), 0721
Hausa (ha), 0801
Hindi (hi), 0809
Croatian (hr), 0818
Hungarian (hu), 0821
Armenian (hy), 0825
Interlingua (ia), 0901
Interlingue (ie), 0905
Inupiak (ik), 0911
Indonesian (in), 0914
Icelandic (is), 0919
Hebrew (iw), 0923
Yiddish (ji), 1009
Javanese (jw), 1023
Georgian (ka), 1101
Kazakh (kk), 1111
Greenlandic (kl), 1112
Cambodian (km), 1113
Kannada (kn), 1114
Kashmiri (ks), 1119
Kurdish (ku), 1121
Afar (aa), 0101
Telugu (te), 2005
Tajik (tg), 2007
Thai (th), 2008
Abkhazian (ab), 0102
Afrikaans (af), 0106
Amharic (am), 0113
Arabic (ar), 0118
Assamese (as), 0119
Aymara (ay), 0125
Azerbaijani (az), 0126
Bashkir (ba), 0201
Byelorussian (be), 0205
Bulgarian (bg), 0207
Bihari (bh), 0208
Bislama (bi), 0209
Bengali (bn), 0214
Tibetan (bo), 0215
Breton (br), 0218
Catalan (ca), 0301
Corsican (co), 0315
Czech (cs), 0319
Tigrinya (ti), 2009
Turkmen (tk), 2011
Tagalog (tl), 2012
Setswana (tn), 2014
Tonga (to), 2015
Turkish (tr), 2018
Tsonga (ts), 2019
Tatar (tt), 2020
Twi (tw), 2023
Ukrainian (uk), 2111
Urdu (ur), 2118
Uzbek (uz), 2126
Vietnamese (vi), 2209
Volapük (vo), 2215
Wolof (wo), 2315
Xhosa (xh), 2408
Yoruba (yo), 2515
Zulu (zu), 2621
Nepali (ne), 1405
Norwegian (no), 1415
Occitan (oc), 1503
Oromo (om), 1513
Oriya (or), 1518
Panjabi (pa), 1601
Polish (pl), 1612
Pashto, Pushto (ps), 1619
Quechua (qu), 1721
Rhaeto-Romance (rm), 1813
Kirundi (rn), 1814
Romanian (ro), 1815
Kinyarwanda (rw), 1823
Sanskrit (sa), 1901
Sindhi (sd), 1904
Welsh (cy), 0325
Danish (da), 0401
Sangho (sg), 1907
Serbo-Croatian (sh), 1908
Country/Area code list
Country/Area, Country/Area code, Code letter
Argentina, 0118, ar
Australia, 0121, au
Austria, 0120, at
Belgium, 0205, be
Brazil, 0218, br
Canada, 0301, ca
Chile, 0312, cl
Finland, 0609, fi
France, 0618, fr
Germany, 0405, de
Hong Kong, 0811, hk
India, 0914, in
Indonesia, 0904, id
Italy, 0920, it
Japan, 1016, jp
Malaysia, 1325, my
Mexico, 1324, mx
Netherlands, 1412, nl
New Zealand, 1426, nz
Norway, 1415, no
Pakistan, 1611, pk
Philippines, 1608, ph
Portugal, 1620, pt
Singapore, 1907, sg
Spain, 0519, es
Sweden, 1905, se
Switzerland, 0308, ch
Taiwan, 2023, tw
Thailand, 2008, th
United Kingdom, 0702, gb
USA, 2119, us
China, 0314, cn
Denmark, 0411, dk
Korea, Republic of, 1118, kr
Russian Federation, 1821, ru
117
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional information
15
On-screen displays and recorder displays
The table below shows a list of error messages that you may encounter when using the recorder and an explanation
of their meaning.
Message
Explanation/Action
• Initializing disc. Please wait a moment.
When you load a blank DVD-RW disc, the recorder automatically
initializes it.
• Incompatible region number.
The disc loaded has an incompatible region number for the
recorder and so will not play.
• Cannot record any more titles.
• No more space for file management data.
• Cannot add any more chapter marks.
The disc control data limit has been reached, or the maximum
number of chapters and/or titles has been reached. Erase titles/
chapters or combine chapters.
• This disc cannot be recorded. Undo the final-
ization.
The disc was finalized on a non-Pioneer DVD recorder. Undo the
finalization in order to recording/editing.
• Cannot play this disc.
• This disc cannot be recorded.
• Cannot read the CPRM information.
• Could not record the information to the disc.
• Cannot edit.
The disc may be dirty or damaged. Take out the disc, clean it and
retry. If the error persists, use a new disc. If the error appears even
with a new disc, please consult a Pioneer Service Center.
• Could not initialize disc.
• Could not complete finalization successfully.
• Could not undo finalization successfully.
• Could not successfully unlock the disc.
• Incompatible or unreadable disc.
The disc loaded is a DVD+R/RW or some other incompatible disc
type. This display may also appear if the disc is dirty or damaged.
• Cannot record to a disc that is not CPRM com-
patible.
The video source is copy-once protected. Use a VR mode DVD-R/
RW disc with CPRM for recording.
• Cannot record this content using Video mode
recording.
• This content is copy protected.
• Incorrect CPRM information.
The video source is copy-protected and cannot be recorded.
The recorder could not read the CPRM information. The recorder
may be damaged—please consult a Pioneer Service Center.
• The audio will conform to the [Bilingual
Recording] setting.
When recording from an external input in Video mode (DVD), Video
Mode On (HDD), or in LPCM mode, you can only record the left or
right channel; not both.
• Repairing disc.
During recording, the power was cut. This display appears when
the power is restored.
• Could not repair the disc.
The recorder was unable to repair the disc after a power cut. The
contents of the recording will be lost.
• Overheating has stopped operation.
Press DISPLAY to clear this message.
The internal temperature of the recorder has exceeded the
operating limit. If this message reappears, please contact a
Pioneer authorized service center.
• There is no DV input or the input signal is unre- No signal was detected at the DV IN jack. This may appear if a
cordable.
blank section of DV tape is playing in the connected camcorder.
• Cannot preview because there is no DV input
or the input signal is unrecordable.
118
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional information
15
Message
Explanation/Action
• HDD optimization is recommended. This can be The HDD should be optimized (basically, HDD housekeeping) to
done using Disc Setup. maintain playback and recording performance.
• Please perform HDD optimization. This can be The HDD is in more urgent need of optimization in order to
done using Disc Setup.
maintain performance.
• The HDD has not been sufficiently optimized.
Please optimize again.
If this message appears repeatedly after optimizing the HDD it is
likely that there is not enough free space on the HDD for
optimization to complete properly. Please erase some titles from
the HDD and optimize again.
• This channel’s TV system is different from the
recorder’s setting.
The TV system (PAL, NTSC, etc.) of the current channel is different
from the TV system settings of this recorder.
• Recording failed due to a TV system mismatch. The timer recording failed because the TV system of the channel
Press DISPLAY to clear message. set for recording was different from the setting of the recorder.
• Playback has stopped because the TV system is During recording or timer recording standby, the TV System (PAL,
different than the recording.
NTSC, etc.) of the playback video changed, causing playback to
stop automatically.
instrument. These could all damage the disc.
Handling discs
When holding discs of any type, take care not to leave
fingerprints, dirt or scratches on the disc surface. Hold
the disc by its edge or by the center hole and edge.
For more detailed care information see the instructions
that come with discs.
Damaged or dirty discs can affect playback and
recording performance. Take care also not to scratch the
label side of the disc. Although not as fragile as the
recorded side, scratches can still result in a disc
becoming unusable.
Do not load more than one disc into the recorder.
Damaged discs
Should a disc become marked with fingerprints, dust,
etc., clean using a soft, dry cloth, wiping the disc lightly
from the center to the outside edge. Do not wipe with a
circular motion.
Discs spin at high speed inside the recorder. If you can
see that a disc is cracked, chipped, warped, or otherwise
damaged, don't risk using it; you could end up damaging
the recorder.
This recorder is designed for use with conventional, fully
circular discs only. Use of shaped discs is not
recommended for this product. Pioneer disclaims all
liability arising in connection with the use of shaped
discs.
If necessary, use a cloth soaked in alcohol, or a
commercially available CD/DVD cleaning kit to clean a
disc more thoroughly. Never use benzine, thinner or
other cleaning agents, including products designed for
cleaning vinyl records.
Storing discs
Although CDs and DVD discs are more durable than vinyl
records, you should still take care to handle and store
discs correctly. When you're not using a disc, return it to
its case and store upright. Avoid leaving discs in
excessively cold, humid, or hot environments (including
under direct sunlight).
Don't glue paper or put stickers onto the disc, or use a
pencil, ball-point pen or other sharp-tipped writing
119
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional information
Cleaning the pickup lens
15
Moving the recorder
If you need to move the recorder, first remove the disc, if
there’s one loaded, and close the disc tray. Next, press ꢃ
STANDBY/ON to switch the power to standby, checking
that the POWER OFF indication in the display goes off.
Wait at least two minutes. Lastly, disconnect the power
cord. Never lift or move the unit during playback or
recording—discs rotate at a high speed and may be
damaged.
The DVD recorder’s lens should not become dirty in
normal use, but if for some reason it should malfunction
due to dust or dirt, consult your nearest Pioneer-
authorized service center. Although lens cleaners are
commercially available, we do not recommend using
them since some may damage the lens.
Condensation
Condensation may form inside the recorder if it is
brought into a warm room from outside, or if the
temperature of the room rises quickly. Although the
condensation won’t damage the recorder, it may
temporarily impair its performance. For this reason you
should leave it to adjust to the warmer temperature for
about an hour before switching on and using.
Hints on installation
We want you to enjoy using this unit for years to come, so
please bear in mind the following points when choosing
a suitable location for it:
Do...
ꢆ
Use in a well-ventilated room.
ꢆ
Place on a solid, flat, level surface, such as a table,
shelf or stereo rack.
Don’t...
ꢇ
Use in a place exposed to high temperatures or
humidity, including near radiators and other heat-
generating appliances.
ꢇ
Place on a window sill or other place where the
recorder will be exposed to direct sunlight.
Use in a dusty or damp environment or in a room
where it will be exposed to excessive cigarette smoke.
Place directly on top of an amplifier, or other
ꢇ
ꢇ
component in your stereo system that becomes hot in
use.
ꢇ
Use near a television or monitor as you may
experience interference—especially if the television uses
an indoor antenna.
ꢇ
Use in a kitchen or other room where the recorder
may be exposed to smoke or steam.
Use on a thick rug or carpet, or cover with cloth—this
may prevent proper cooling of the unit.
Place on an unstable surface, or one that is not large
enough to support all four of the unit’s feet.
ꢇ
ꢇ
120
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional information
15
DRM (Digital Rights Management)
DRM (Digital Rights Management) copy protection is a
technology designed to prevent unauthorized copying by
restricting playback, etc. of material on devices other the
PC (or other WMA recording equipment) used to record
it. For detailed information, please see the instruction
manuals or help files that came with your PC (or other
WMA recording equipment) and/or software.
Glossary
Analog audio
An electrical signal that directly represents sound.
Compare this to digital audio which can be an electrical
signal, but is an indirect representation of sound. See
also Digital audio.
DTS
Aspect ratio
The width of a TV screen relative to its height.
Conventional TVs are 4:3 (in other words, the screen is
almost square); widescreen models are 16:9 (the screen
is almost twice as wide as it is high).
DTS stands for Digital Theater System. DTS is a surround
system different from Dolby Digital that has become a
popular surround sound format for movies.
Chapter
“DTS” and “DTS Digital Out” are registered trademarks of
Digital Theater Systems, Inc.
Just as a book is split up into several chapters, a title on
the HDD/a DVD disc is usually divided into chapters. See
also Title.
Dynamic range
The difference between the quietest and loudest sounds
possible in an audio signal (without distorting or getting
lost in noise). Dolby Digital and DTS soundtracks are
capable of a wide dynamic range, delivering dramatic
cinema-like effects.
Digital audio
An indirect representation of sound by numbers. During
recording, the sound is measured at discrete intervals
(44,100 times a second for CD audio) by an analog-to-
digital converter, generating a stream of numbers. On
playback, a digital-to-analog converter generates an
analog signal based on these numbers. See also
Sampling frequency and Analog audio.
EXIF (Exchangeable Image File)
A file format developed by Fuji Photo Film for digital still
cameras. Digital cameras from various manufacturers
use this compressed file format which carries date, time
and thumbnail information, as well as the picture data.
Dolby Digital
File extension
A tag added to the end of a filename to indicate the type
of file. For example, “.mp3” indicates an MP3 file.
ISO 9660 format
International standard for the volume and file structure of
CD-ROM discs.
®
Dolby Digital Stereo Creator enables consumers to
create stereo DVD-Videos with stunning Dolby Digital
sound tracks at home. The technology, when utilized
instead of PCM recording, also saves recordable disc
space, allowing for higher video resolution or extended
recording time on each DVD. DVDs mastered using
Dolby Digital Stereo Creator will play back on all DVD-
Video players.
JPEG
A file format used for still images, such as photographs
and illustrations. JPEG files are identified by the file
extension “.jpg” or “.JPG”. Most digital cameras use this
format.
MP3
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.
"Dolby" and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby
Laboratories.
MP3 (MPEG1 audio layer 3) is a compressed audio file
format. Files are recognized by their file extension “.mp3”
or “.MP3”.
121
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional information
15
MPEG audio
Track
Audio CDs and Video CDs use tracks to divide up the
content of a disc. The DVD equivalent is called a chapter.
See also Chapter.
An audio format used on Video CDs and some DVD
discs. This unit can convert MPEG audio to PCM format
for wider compatibility with digital recorders and AV
amp/receivers. See also PCM.
WMA
WMA is short for Windows Media Audio and refers to an
audio compression technology developed by Microsoft
Corporation. WMA data can be encoded by using
Windows Media Player version 9 or 10, or Windows
Media Player for Windows XP. Files are recognized by
their file extension “.wma” or “.WMA”.
MPEG video
The video format used for Video CDs and DVDs. Video CD
uses the older MPEG-1 standard, while DVD uses the
newer and much better quality MPEG-2 standard.
Microsoft, Windows Media, and the Windows logo are
trademarks, or registered trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
Optical digital output
A jack that outputs digital audio in the form of light
pulses. Connect components with optical digital jacks
using a special optical cord, available from specialist
audio dealers.
PCM (Pulse Code Modulation)
The most common system of encoding digital audio,
found on CDs and DAT. Excellent quality, but requires a
lot of data compared to formats such as Dolby Digital
and MPEG audio. For compatibility with digital audio
recorders (CD, MD and DAT) and AV amp/receivers with
digital inputs, this unit can convert Dolby Digital and
MPEG audio to PCM. See also Digital audio.
PBC (PlayBack Control) (Video CD/Super VCD only)
A system of navigating a Video CD/Super VCD through
on-screen menus recorded onto the disc. Especially good
for discs that you would normally not watch from
beginning to end all at once—karaoke discs, for example.
Regions (DVD only)
ALL
2
(example region code marks)
Regions associate discs and players with particular
areas of the world. This unit will only play discs that have
compatible region codes. You can find the region code of
your unit by looking on the rear panel. Some discs are
compatible with more than one region (or all regions).
Sampling frequency
The rate at which sound is measured to be turned into
digital audio data. The higher the rate, the better the
sound quality, but the more digital information is
generated. Standard CD audio has a sampling frequency
of 44.1kHz, which means 44,100 samples
(measurements) per second. See also Digital audio.
Title
A collection of chapters on a the HDD/DVD disc. See also
Chapter.
122
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional information
Specifications
15
DVD-R/DVD-RW
Fine (XP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 1 hour
Standard Play (SP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 2 hours
Long Play (LP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 4 hours
Extended Play (EP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 6 hours
Super Long Play (SLP). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 8 hours
Super Extended Play (SEP). . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 10 hours
Manual Mode (MN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 1–13 hours
General
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HDD, DVD-Video, DVD-R/RW,
Video-CD, Super VCD, CD,
CD-R/RW (WMA, MP3, JPEG, CD-DA)
Power requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220–240 V, 50/60 Hz
Power consumption
DVR-630H . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 W
DVR-530H . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 W
Tuner
Receivable channels
Power consumption in standby mode
0.93 W
SECAM B/G
PAL I
PAL B/G
(Front panel display: off)
Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1 kg
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420 (W) x 59 (H) x 273 (D) mm
Operating temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .+5°C to +35°C
Operating humidity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5% to 85%
(no condensation)
Frequency
Channel
Frequency
Channel
VHF (low)
VHF (high)
47 - 89 MHz
E2 - E4
X - Z
44 - 89 MHz
A - C
X - Z
104 - 300 MHz
E5 - E12
S1 - S20
M1 - M10
U1 - U10
104 - 300 MHz
D - J
11, 13
S1 - S20
Hyper
UHF
302 - 470 MHz
470 - 862 MHz
S21 - S41
E21 - E69
302 - 470 MHz
470 - 862 MHz
S21 - S41
E21 - E69
TV system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PAL/SECAM/
NTSC (external input only)
Recording
SECAM D/K
SECAM L
PAL D/K
Recording format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DVD Video Recording
DVD-VIDEO
Recordable discs
DVD-RW (DVD Re-recordable disc)
DVD-R (DVD Recordable disc)
Frequency
Channel
Frequency
Channel
VHF (low)
VHF (high)
49 - 65 MHz
FB, FC1, FC 49 - 94 MHz
R1 - R5
104 - 300 MHz
F1 - F6
B - Q
104 - 300 MHz
R6 - R12
S1 - S20
Hyper
UHF
300 - 470 MHz
470 - 862 MHz
S21 - S41
21 - 69
302 - 470 MHz
470 - 862 MHz
S21 - S41
E21 - E69
Video recording format
Sampling frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.5MHz
Compression format. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MPEG
Audio recording format
Sampling frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48kHz
Compression format. . . . . . . . .Dolby Digital or Linear PCM
(uncompressed)
STEREO
B/G - A2
I - NICAM
L - NICAM
B/G - NICAM
D/K - NICAM
Recording time
HDD (250GB)
Timer
XP+ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 36 hours
Fine (XP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 53 hours
Standard Play (SP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 106 hours
Long Play (LP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 212 hours
Extended Play (EP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 319 hours
Super Long Play (SLP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 425 hours
Super Extended Play (SEP) . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 532 hours
Manual Mode (MN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 36–711 hours
Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 month/32 programs
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Quartz lock (24-hour digital display)
Power off memory . . . .Approx. 5 years (after manufacture)
Input/Output
VHF/UHF antenna input/output terminal . . . . VHF/UHF set
75 Ω (IEC connector)
Video input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Input 1,3 (rear), 2 (front)
Input level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Vp-p (75 Ω)
Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .AV connector 2 (Input 1),
RCA jack (Input 2, 3)
Video output. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .AV1, Output
Output level. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Vp-p (75 Ω)
Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AV connector (AV1)
RCA jack (Output)
S-Video input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Input 1, 3 (rear), 2 (front)
Y (luminance) - Input level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Vp-p (75 Ω)
C (colour) - Input level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300 mVp-p (75 Ω)
Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .AV connector 2 (Input 1),
4 pin mini DIN (Input 2, 3)
HDD (160GB)
XP+ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 23 hours
Fine (XP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 34 hours
Standard Play (SP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 68 hours
Long Play (LP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 136 hours
Extended Play (EP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 204 hours
Super Long Play (SLP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 272 hours
Super Extended Play (SEP) . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 340 hours
Manual Mode (MN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 23–455 hours
123
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional information
15
S-Video output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AV1, Output
Y (luminance) - Output level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 Vp-p (75 Ω)
C (colour) - Output level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300 mVp-p (75 Ω)
Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AV connector 1 (AV1),
4 pin mini DIN (Output)
Component video output
Output level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Y: 1.0 Vp-p (75 Ω)
Supplied accessories
Remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Dry cell batteries (AA/R6P). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Audio / Video cable (red/white/yellow) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
G-LINK™ cable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
RF antenna cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Power cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Operating Instructions
P , P : 0.7 Vp-p (75 Ω)
B
R
Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .RCA jacks
RGB input
Warranty card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Input level. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .0.7 Vp-p (75Ω)
Jacks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .AV connector 2 (Input 1)
RGB output
Note: The specifications and design of this product are subject
to change without notice, due to improvement.
Output level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .0.7 Vp-p (75Ω)
Jacks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AV connector 1 (AV1)
Audio input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Input 1, 3 (rear), 2 (front) L/R
Input level
During audio input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2V rms
(Input impedance: more than 22 kΩ)
Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AV connector 2 (Input 1),
RCA jacks (Input 2, 3)
Audio output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AV1, Output
During audio output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2V rms
(Output impedance: less than 1.5 kΩ)
Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AV connector 1 (AV1),
RCA jacks (Output)
Control input. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Mini jack
DV input. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 pin (front)
(i.LINK/IEEE 1394 standard)
G-LINK™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Minijack
AV Connectors (21-pin connector assignment)
AV connector input/output . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-pin connector
This connector provides the video and audio signals for
connection to a compatible colour TV or monitor.
PIN no.
AV1(RGB)-TV / AV2(INPUT 1)
1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Audio 2/R out / Audio 2/R out
2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . – / Audio 2/R in
11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G out / G in
3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Audio 1/L out / Audio 1/L out
6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . – / Audio 1/L in
15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R or C out / R or C in
4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GND
17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GND
7
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B out / B in
19 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Video out or Y out / Video out
20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . – / Video in or Y in
8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Status
21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GND
124
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional information
15
125
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
DV camcorder
A
error messages 115
recording from 58
setting the audio track to record 103
DVD
Areas (GUIDE Plus+™) 40–47
Audio
digital output settings 103
DV audio settings 58
dynamic range control 99
external audio settings 102
input settings 102
activity display 35
aspect ratios 105, 110
backing up 79
compatibility 9, 49, 111
DVD-R vs DVD-RW 9, 10, 49, 111
finalizing 10, 59, 96
setting preferences for audio language 103
switching on playback 69
switching TV audio 31
Automatic channel setup 25
AV amplifier, connecting to 19
initializing 49, 95
playback controls for 33, 61–70
selecting for playback/recording 30
Video mode vs VR mode 9, 10, 49, 82, 95, 105
C
CD Audio
E
compatibility 9
Easy Timer Recording 54
Editing 81–89
playback controls for 34, 63–69
Chapter
Video mode compatibility and frame accuracy 82,
105
Video mode vs VR mode 82
EPG - See also GUIDE Plus+™
automatic chapter marking 105
definition 121
editing 77, 86
maximum number per title/disc 49
Component video 15
Copying
G
from DVD to HDD 72, 75
from HDD to DVD 72–74, 111
high-speed 71, 78, 111
One Touch Copy 71
real-time 71, 78
restrictions and copyright 71
Video mode compatible and frame accurate 76, 77,
78
GUIDE Plus+™ 12, 22, 38–48
H
HDD
activity display 35
backing up content to DVD 79
disk space and recording quality 116
playback controls for 33
precautions 11
D
selecting for playback/recording 30
Video mode compatibility 49, 82, 105
Home menu 35
Dolby Digital
explained 121
output setting 103
Downloading channel presets from the TV 13, 25
DTS
J
JPEG
CD audio encoded with 34
explained 121
output setting 103
file compatibility 10
viewing in the PhotoViewer 93
Jukebox 90
126
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
optimized 104
settings 104
L
Language
simultaneous playback and 56
time and picture quality 50, 116
TV programs 30, 51
audio 69, 103
code list 117
DVD menu 104
setting for menus and displays (OSD) 104
settings for DVD playback 104
subtitle 104
Video mode vs VR mode 49
Recovery recording 53
Remote control
buttons explained 22–23
changing the batteries 8
operating range 8
setting the remote ID 106
setting up for TV control 109
M
MP3 audio files 9, 121
MPEG audio 122
N
S
NexTView 13
NTSC 24
Subtitles
setting preferences for 104
switching during playback 68
O
One-Button-Record (GUIDE Plus+™) 39
T
Timer recording 53–56
Title
P
defined 122
Picture quality
maximum number recordable 49
maximum recordable length 49
thumbnails 84, 105
TV channels
recording time vs 50, 116
setting for playback 98
setting for recording 97
Play List
compared to Original 11
creating on a VR mode disc 83
switching to Play List view 81
Playback 31–34, 61–70
on-screen displays 36
parental lock for DVD-Video 106
picture quality settings for 98
settings 105
changing 31
manual setting 101
numbering 31
V
Video CD
compatibility 9
playback control (PBC) 34, 61
playback controls for 34, 63–69
VPS/PDC 24, 53, 56
Progressive scan video 27
R
Recording 30, 39, 43, 49–60
audio format 50
W
WMA audio files 9, 10, 122
automatic chapter marking 105
copyright and 50
from a camcorder 58
from an external input 57
on-screen displays 37
127
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Published by Pioneer Corporation.
Copyright © 2005 Pioneer Corporation.
All rights reserved.
PIONEER CORPORATION
4-1, Meguro 1-Chome, Meguro-ku, Tokyo 153-8654, Japan
PIONEER ELECTRONICS (USA) INC.
P.O. BOX 1540, Long Beach, California 90810-1540, U.S.A. TEL: (800) 421-1404
PIONEER ELECTRONICS OF CANADA, INC.
300 Allstate Parkway, Markham, Ontario L3R OP2, Canada TEL: (905) 479-4411
PIONEER EUROPE NV
Haven 1087, Keetberglaan 1, B-9120 Melsele, Belgium TEL: 03/570.05.11
PIONEER ELECTRONICS ASIACENTRE PTE. LTD.
253 Alexandra Road, #04-01, Singapore 159936 TEL: 656-472-1111
PIONEER ELECTRONICS AUSTRALIA PTY. LTD.
178-184 Boundary Road, Braeside, Victoria 3195, Australia, TEL: (03) 9586-6300
PIONEER ELECTRONICS DE MEXICO S.A. DE C.V.
Blvd.Manuel Avila Camacho 138 10 piso Col.Lomas de Chapultepec, Mexico,D.F. 11000 TEL: 55-9178-4270
K002E
Printed in China
<VRB1370-A>
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|
Phase Technology Portable Speaker HP129i User Manual
Philips CD Player JR24CDRW User Manual
Philips CRT Television TS3258 User Manual
Philips Microphone PC Dictation Microphone User Manual
Philips Portable DVD Player PET944 58 User Manual
Pioneer Car Stereo System DEH 3200UB User Manual
Pioneer DVD Recorder DVR X122 User Manual
Pioneer Speaker System S H320V QL User Manual
Poulan Snow Blower 435482 User Manual
Poulan Tiller 96092001600 User Manual